WO2018216778A1 - Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounted device - Google Patents

Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounted device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018216778A1
WO2018216778A1 PCT/JP2018/020037 JP2018020037W WO2018216778A1 WO 2018216778 A1 WO2018216778 A1 WO 2018216778A1 JP 2018020037 W JP2018020037 W JP 2018020037W WO 2018216778 A1 WO2018216778 A1 WO 2018216778A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
actuator
pair
camera
base
holder
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/020037
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
洋平 遠田
政大 齊藤
一隆 其阿弥
裕史 松田
Original Assignee
ミツミ電機株式会社
洋平 遠田
政大 齊藤
一隆 其阿弥
裕史 松田
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2017209582A external-priority patent/JP6997370B2/en
Application filed by ミツミ電機株式会社, 洋平 遠田, 政大 齊藤, 一隆 其阿弥, 裕史 松田 filed Critical ミツミ電機株式会社
Priority to KR1020197033852A priority Critical patent/KR102304672B1/en
Priority to EP18806620.3A priority patent/EP3633446A4/en
Priority to US16/616,516 priority patent/US11567338B2/en
Priority to CN201880034114.4A priority patent/CN110662998B/en
Priority to CN202210490204.2A priority patent/CN115220282B/en
Publication of WO2018216778A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018216778A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/64Imaging systems using optical elements for stabilisation of the lateral and angular position of the image
    • G02B27/646Imaging systems using optical elements for stabilisation of the lateral and angular position of the image compensating for small deviations, e.g. due to vibration or shake
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B7/00Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
    • G02B7/02Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses
    • G02B7/04Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B7/00Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
    • G02B7/02Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses
    • G02B7/04Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification
    • G02B7/08Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification adapted to co-operate with a remote control mechanism
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B7/00Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
    • G02B7/02Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses
    • G02B7/04Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification
    • G02B7/09Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification adapted for automatic focusing or varying magnification
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B13/00Viewfinders; Focusing aids for cameras; Means for focusing for cameras; Autofocus systems for cameras
    • G03B13/32Means for focusing
    • G03B13/34Power focusing
    • G03B13/36Autofocus systems
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/02Bodies
    • G03B17/17Bodies with reflectors arranged in beam forming the photographic image, e.g. for reducing dimensions of camera
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B30/00Camera modules comprising integrated lens units and imaging units, specially adapted for being embedded in other devices, e.g. mobile phones or vehicles
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B5/00Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B5/00Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B5/02Lateral adjustment of lens
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2205/00Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B2205/0007Movement of one or more optical elements for control of motion blur
    • G03B2205/0015Movement of one or more optical elements for control of motion blur by displacing one or more optical elements normal to the optical axis
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2205/00Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B2205/0053Driving means for the movement of one or more optical element
    • G03B2205/0069Driving means for the movement of one or more optical element using electromagnetic actuators, e.g. voice coils

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device.
  • the camera module includes a lens unit having one or more lenses and an image sensor that captures a subject image formed by the lens unit.
  • the camera module disclosed in Patent Document 1 includes a shake correction device that corrects camera shake generated in the camera, and an autofocus device that performs autofocus.
  • a camera module has a shake correction actuator and an autofocus actuator as camera actuators.
  • the shake correction actuator includes a first actuator and a second actuator that swing the prism about two different axes. When camera shake occurs, the shake correction actuator swings the prism under the control of the control unit. As a result, camera shake generated in the camera is corrected.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device that can improve the degree of design freedom around the optical path bending member.
  • One aspect of the camera actuator according to the present invention is an optical path bending member, a lens portion disposed at a subsequent stage of the optical path bending member, and a first unit disposed near the optical path bending member to displace the optical path bending member.
  • a second actuator is disposed in the vicinity of the lens portion in the first direction so as to be spaced apart from each other, and the lens portion is displaced in each of the second direction and the third direction orthogonal to the first direction and orthogonal to each other.
  • An actuator and a third actuator is disposed in the vicinity of the lens portion in the first direction so as to be spaced apart from each other, and the lens portion is displaced in each of the second direction and the third direction orthogonal to the first direction and orthogonal to each other.
  • One aspect of the camera module according to the present invention includes the above-described camera actuator and an image sensor disposed at the rear stage of the lens unit.
  • One aspect of the camera mounting device includes the above-described camera module and a control unit that controls the camera module.
  • a camera actuator it is possible to provide a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device that can improve the degree of design freedom around the optical path bending member.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a camera module according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the camera module viewed from a different angle from FIG. 1A. It is a perspective view of a camera module in a state where a case is omitted. It is the perspective view of the camera module seen from the angle different from FIG. 2 in the state which abbreviate
  • FIG. 9A is a perspective view of the prism module in a state where the first cover is omitted
  • FIG. 9B is an E-section of FIG. 9A for explaining a state in which the pressing portion of the holding spring presses the pressed portion of the holder. It is sectional drawing equivalent to E cross section. It is a perspective view which takes out and shows only a restraining spring.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the lens module when cut along the line DD in FIG. 1A. It is a perspective view of a lens module in the state where the second cover was omitted.
  • FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the lens module in a state in which a second cover is omitted from a different angle from FIG. 12.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a camera module according to Embodiment 2.
  • FIG. It is sectional drawing of the prism module part of a camera module. It is a figure which shows an example of the camera mounting apparatus which mounts a camera module.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the prism module of the camera module according to Embodiment 3 taken along line CC in FIG. 1A. It is the E section enlarged view of FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view of the prism module taken along line AA in FIG. 1A.
  • FIG. It is a perspective view in the state where some members were assembled to the first base.
  • FIG. 27 is a perspective view of a state in which a swing support spring is assembled to the first base in the state shown in FIG. 26. It is a perspective view of a prism module in a state where a first cover and a prism are omitted. It is a perspective view of a prism module in a state where a first cover is omitted.
  • FIG. 52A is a schematic diagram showing a gel locking part of a spring according to Embodiment 8
  • FIG. 52B is a schematic diagram showing Modification 1 of the gel locking part
  • FIG. 52C is a gel locking part. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of a part.
  • Embodiment 1] 1A and 1B are perspective views of a camera module 1 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
  • 2 and 3 are perspective views of the camera module 1 with the case removed.
  • 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1A
  • FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 1A.
  • the camera module 1 is mounted on a thin camera mounting device such as a smartphone (see FIG. 22), a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, an in-vehicle camera, and the like.
  • the camera module 1 is mounted so that the X direction is the left-right direction, the Y direction is the up-down direction, and the Z direction is the front-rear direction, for example, when shooting is actually performed by the camera mounting device.
  • the light from the subject enters the prism 23 of the prism module 2 from the Z direction + side (plus side) as indicated by a broken line ⁇ (also referred to as a first optical axis) in FIG.
  • the light incident on the prism 23 is bent at the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 as shown by a broken line ⁇ (also referred to as a second optical axis) in FIG.
  • the light is guided to the lens portion 33 of the lens module 3 arranged on the side).
  • the subject image formed by the lens unit 33 is imaged by the imaging element module 4 disposed at the subsequent stage of the lens module 3.
  • the camera module 1 described above is shake-corrected by the first shake correction device 24 (see FIG. 4) incorporated in the prism module 2 and the second shake correction device 37 (see FIG. 5) incorporated in the lens module 3.
  • OIS Optical Image Stabilization
  • the camera module 1 described above performs autofocus by displacing the lens unit 33 in the X direction by the AF device 36 incorporated in the lens module 3.
  • the camera module 1 described above has a camera actuator that drives the first shake correction device 24, the second shake correction device 37, and the AF device 36.
  • a camera actuator includes a first actuator 244 that drives the first shake correction device 24, a pair of second actuators 370a and 370b that drives the second shake correction device 37, and a pair of AF that drives the AF device 36.
  • Actuators 364a and 364b are provided.
  • the arrangement of the first actuator 244 is devised to improve the degree of freedom of design around the prism 23 that is an optical path bending member, and the second actuators 370a and 370b and the AF actuator in the lens module 3 are devised.
  • the arrangement mode of 364a and 364b is devised. The arrangement mode of each actuator will become clear from the description of the prism module 2 and the lens module 3 described later.
  • the prism module 2, the lens module 3, and the image sensor module 4 included in the camera module 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A to 19.
  • the prism module 2 includes a first cover 21, a first base 22, a prism 23, and a first shake correction device 24.
  • the first cover 21 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin or a nonmagnetic metal, and is a box-shaped member that is open on both sides in the Z direction and on the X direction + side. Light from the subject side can enter the internal space of the first cover 21 through the opening in the Z direction + side of the first cover 21.
  • the first cover 21 as described above is combined with the first base 22 described later from the Z direction + side.
  • the first base 22 supports a holder 241 (see FIGS. 4 and 8) of a first shake correction device 24, which will be described later, so as to be able to swing around a first axis parallel to the Y direction.
  • the first base 22 has a first bearing portion 225a and a second bearing portion 225b (see FIG. 7) which are bearing portions.
  • the first base 22 is a box-shaped member that is open on the Z direction + side and the X direction + side.
  • a base first opening 220 (see FIG. 4) is formed in a wall portion on the Z direction ⁇ side of the first base 22 (that is, the bottom wall portion 229).
  • a first coil 244 c and a first Hall element 244 e of the first actuator 244 described later are disposed in the base first opening 220.
  • the first base 22 is combined with the first cover 21 to form a first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 4) in which the first shake correction device 24 and the prism 23 can be arranged.
  • first base 22 has first side wall portions 224a and 224b (see FIG. 7) opposed to the Y direction at both ends in the Y direction.
  • a first bearing portion 225a is provided on the first side wall portion 224a on the Y direction + side.
  • a second bearing portion 225b is provided on the first side wall portion 224b on the Y direction minus side.
  • the first bearing portion 225a and the second bearing portion 225b have shapes symmetrical to each other in the Y direction.
  • the first bearing portion 225a has a substantially V-shaped notch shape that opens in the Z direction + side when viewed in the Y direction. Both side surfaces in the X direction of the first bearing portion 225a are curved.
  • a first positioning convex portion 226, a second positioning convex portion 227, and a third positioning convex portion 228 are formed on the end surfaces on the Z direction + side of the first side wall portions 224a and 224b, respectively. Yes.
  • the first positioning convex portion 226 and the second positioning convex portion 227 engage with a pair of holding springs 242 (see FIG. 10) described later, and prevent the pair of holding springs 242 from shifting in the Y direction.
  • the third positioning protrusion 228 engages with the pair of holding springs 242 to position the pair of holding springs 242 when assembled.
  • the bearing portion may be a bearing such as a rolling bearing or a sliding bearing, for example.
  • the prism 23 has a triangular prism shape, and is disposed in the first accommodation space 223 while being held by a holder 241 (see FIGS. 4 and 8) of the first shake correction device 24 described later.
  • Such a prism 23 bends incident light from the subject side (that is, the Z direction + side) at the optical path bending surface 231 (see FIG. 4), and the direction of the lens unit 33 described later (that is, the X direction + side). To guide the light.
  • the optical path bending surface 231 is a surface parallel to the Y direction, and a predetermined angle (45 ° in the present embodiment) with respect to the first optical axis (that is, the Z direction) so that the above-described light guide is possible. Just tilted.
  • the structure of the prism 23 may be different from that of the present embodiment as long as incident light from the subject side can be guided to the lens unit 33.
  • the first shake correction device 24 swings the prism 23 around a first axis parallel to the Y direction, and performs shake correction in the rotational direction around the first axis. Such a first shake correction device 24 is arranged in the first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 4).
  • the first shake correction device 24 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) includes a holder 241, a pair of holding springs 242, and a first actuator 244.
  • the holder 241 is supported by the first base 22 so as to be swingable. In this state, the holder 241 can swing around the first axis based on the driving force of the first actuator 244.
  • the first actuator 244 is driven under the control of a control unit (not shown), the holder 241 and the prism 23 swing around the first axis. Thereby, the shake in the rotational direction around the first axis is corrected.
  • specific structures of the holder 241, the holding spring 242, and the first actuator 244 will be described.
  • the holder 241 (see FIGS. 6 and 8) is made of, for example, a synthetic resin and holds the prism 23 in a swingable manner with respect to the first base 22.
  • the holder 241 has a mounting surface 241a (see FIGS. 6 and 8) that faces the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 from the back side (Z direction-side).
  • the mounting surface 241a has, for example, a surface parallel to the optical path bending surface 231.
  • the mounting surface 241a is not limited to the structure of the present embodiment, and may be a boss having a shape that enables positioning of the prism 23, for example.
  • the holder 241 has a pair of swing support portions 241c and 241d (see FIGS. 6 and 8) provided coaxially with each other.
  • the center axis of the swing support portions 241c and 241d is the swing center axis (that is, the first axis) of the holder 241.
  • the swing support portions 241c and 241d are respectively provided on a pair of opposing wall portions 241f and 241g (see FIGS. 6 and 8) that sandwich the mounting surface 241a from both sides in the Y direction. Specifically, the swing support portion 241c is provided on the Y direction + side surface of the opposing wall portion 241f. Such a swinging support portion 241 c is engaged with the first bearing portion 225 a of the first base 22.
  • the swing support portion 241d is provided on the Y direction-side surface of the opposing wall portion 241g. Such a swinging support portion 241 d is engaged with the second bearing portion 225 b of the first base 22.
  • the holder 241 has pressed parts 241i and 241k (see FIGS. 2, 3 and 8). Each of the pressed parts 241i and 241k is pressed in the Z direction-side (that is, toward the first base 22) by a pair of holding springs 242 described later. Thereby, the holder 241 is positioned in the Z direction.
  • the pressed portion 241i (see FIGS. 2 and 8) on the Y direction + side is two convex portions formed on the Y direction + side surface of the opposing wall portion 241f. Specifically, the pressed portion 241i is provided on both sides in the X direction of the swing support portion 241c on the Y direction + side surface of the opposing wall portion 241f.
  • the pressed portion 241k (see FIG. 3) on the Y direction-side is two convex portions formed on the Y direction-side surface of the opposing wall portion 241g. Specifically, the pressed portion 241k is provided on both sides in the X direction of the swing support portion 241d on the Y direction-side surface of the opposing wall portion 241g.
  • Each of the pressed parts 241i and 241k as described above has a spherical outer peripheral surface.
  • each of the pressed parts 241i and 241k has a circular shape in which a cross-sectional shape cut along a plane parallel to the ZX plane has a diameter that decreases as the distance from the opposing wall parts 241f and 241g increases. For this reason, the contact between the outer peripheral surfaces of the pressed parts 241i and 241k and the pair of holding springs 242 is a point contact.
  • the force of the pair of holding springs 242 pressing the pressed parts 241i and 241k includes a component in the center of the holder 241 in the Y direction. .
  • the holder 241 is positioned in the Y direction and reduced in backlash.
  • the holder 241 returns to the initial position based on the elastic force of the pair of holding springs 242 when the energization of the first actuator 244 described later is cut off.
  • the initial position of the holder 241 means a state where the holder 241 is not swung by the first actuator 244.
  • Each of the pair of holding springs 242 (see FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 10) is an urging mechanism, and is fixed to the first base 22.
  • Each of the holding springs 242 presses the holder 241 in the Z direction-side (that is, the direction toward the first base 22). At the same time, the holding springs 242 press the holders 241 from both sides in the Y direction toward the center in the Y direction.
  • each of the holding springs 242 is fixed to a part of the pair of first side wall portions 224a and 224b (specifically, end surfaces on the Z direction + side) by a fixing means such as an adhesive.
  • the fixing means may be, for example, a fixing means using a fastening part (for example, a set of rivets, bolts, bolts and nuts).
  • Each of the pair of holding springs 242 as described above is a metal leaf spring, as shown in FIG. 10, and has a fixed base portion 242a and a pair of pressing portions 242c.
  • the fixed base 242a is a portion fixed to the first base 22.
  • a spring-side first hole 242e, a spring-side second hole 242g, and a spring-side third hole 242i are formed.
  • the first positioning projection 226 and the second positioning projection 227 of the first base 22 are inserted through the spring-side first hole 242e and the spring-side second hole 242g (see FIGS. 2 and 3). With this configuration, the displacement of the holding spring 242 in the Y direction due to the reaction force from the holder 241 is prevented.
  • the third positioning projection 228 of the first base 22 is inserted through the spring-side third hole 242i (see FIGS. 2 and 3). With this configuration, positioning when the holding spring 242 is assembled to the first base 22 is achieved.
  • Each of the pair of pressing parts 242c extends in a direction approaching the holder 241 from two places of the fixed base part 242a.
  • Each of the pair of pressing portions 242c presses the pressed portion 241i of the holder 241 in the Z direction-side. Accordingly, the swing support portion 241 c of the holder 241 is pressed against the first bearing portion 225 a of the first base 22.
  • Each of the pair of pressing portions 242c presses the pressed portion 241i of the holder 241 toward the center of the holder 241 in the Y direction.
  • the first actuator 244 swings the holder 241 about the first axis.
  • the first actuator 244 is disposed on the back side of the prism 23 and the holder 241 (that is, Z direction) so as to overlap the optical path bending surface 231 and the holder 241 of the prism 23 in the Z direction (that is, the direction of the first optical axis). (Direction-side).
  • the direction of the first optical axis corresponds to the first direction.
  • the first actuator 244 includes a first magnet 244a, a first coil 244c, and a first Hall element 244e.
  • a first actuator 244 is a so-called moving magnet type in which a first magnet 244a is fixed to a holder 241 which is a movable member and a first coil 244c is fixed to a first base 22 which is a fixed member. Actuator.
  • the first actuator 244 may be a so-called moving coil type actuator in which the first coil 244c is fixed to the holder 241 and the first magnet 244a is fixed to the first base 22. Since the structure of each part constituting the first actuator 244 is almost the same as a conventionally known structure, detailed description thereof is omitted. Hereinafter, the arrangement of each part constituting the first actuator 244 will be described.
  • the first magnet 244a is fixed to the back side surface of the holder 241 (that is, the surface on the Z direction side).
  • the first magnet 244a has a magnetization direction in the Z direction and has two magnetic poles on one side.
  • the first coil 244c and the first Hall element 244e are fixed to the surface of the flexible printed circuit board (hereinafter referred to as FPC) 25 (that is, the surface on the Z direction + side) fixed to the back side surface of the first base 22. Yes.
  • the first coil 244c and the first hall element 244e are disposed in the base first opening 220 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) of the first base 22.
  • the first coil 244c is a so-called air-core coil having an oval shape.
  • the first hall element 244e is disposed inside the first coil 244c in the radial direction.
  • the first actuator 244 when a current flows through the first coil 244c via the FPC 25 under the control of a camera shake correction control unit (not shown), the first magnet 244a is moved in the X direction. A Lorentz force is generated that displaces the lens. Since the first magnet 244a is fixed to the holder 241, a moment about the first axis acts on the holder 241 based on the Lorentz force. As a result, the holder 241 swings around the first axis. By controlling the direction of the current flowing through the first coil 244c, the displacement direction of the holder 241 is switched.
  • the lens module 3 includes a second cover 31, a second base 32, a lens unit 33, an AF device 36, a second shake correction device 37, and a reference member 38, as shown in FIGS.
  • the second cover 31 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin or a nonmagnetic metal, and is a box-shaped member that is open on both sides in the X direction and on the Z direction-side (that is, the back side).
  • the second cover 31 as described above is combined with the second base 32 to be described later from the Z direction + side.
  • the second base 32 (see FIGS. 14 and 15) is combined with the above-described second cover 31, whereby the second accommodation space 320 (in which the lens unit 33, the AF device 36, and the second shake correction device 37 can be disposed). 11).
  • the second base 32 has a bottom surface portion 321 and a pair of second side wall portions 322a and 322b.
  • the bottom surface portion 321 includes a base portion made of synthetic resin and a metal reinforcing plate 323 insert-molded on the base portion. Such a reinforcing plate 323 contributes to increase in rigidity and thickness of the bottom surface portion 321.
  • the reinforcing plate 323 of the second base 32 is disposed so as to overlap the lens guide 361 on the Z direction-side with respect to a lens guide 361 described later.
  • a range in which the lens guide 361 can move during autofocus operation ie, a range that can move in the X direction
  • a range that can move during shake correction operation ie, move in the Y direction
  • the lens guide 361 is present on the Z direction + side of the reinforcing plate 323 regardless of the position in any possible range. For this reason, the surface of the reinforcing plate 323 (that is, the surface on the + Z direction side) is always covered with the lens guide 361 and is not exposed. Thereby, the reflected light from the reinforcing plate 323 is prevented from entering the lens unit 33 and eventually the image sensor of the image sensor module 4 described later.
  • Bottom face through-holes 321a and 321b are formed on both sides in the Y direction of the reinforcing plate 323 in the bottom face portion 321.
  • AF coils 366a and 366b of a pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b which will be described later, are disposed in the bottom surface through holes 321a and 321b (see FIGS. 5 and 11).
  • Each of the second side wall portions 322a and 322b extends from the Y direction both ends of the bottom surface portion 321 to the Z direction + side.
  • the second side wall portions 322a and 322b have coil placement portions 322d and 322e, respectively.
  • Second coils 372a and 372b of a second shake correction device 37 which will be described later, are placed on the coil placement portions 322d and 322e, respectively (see FIGS. 5 and 11).
  • a pair of magnet spaces 322g and 322h are formed between the pair of coil placement portions 322d and 322e and the bottom surface portion 321.
  • AF magnets 365a and 365b of a pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b described later are disposed, respectively.
  • the bottom through-holes 321a and 321b and the coil mounting portions 322d and 322e overlap with each other at a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Therefore, the AF coils 366a and 366b disposed in the bottom surface through-holes 321a and 321b and the second coils 372a and 372b mounted on the coil mounting portions 322d and 322e have a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Open and overlap.
  • the second side wall portion 322a has spring placement portions 324a and 324c (see FIG. 2) for placing springs 362a and 362c, which will be described later, at both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the Y direction + side.
  • the second side wall portion 322b has spring arrangement portions 324b and 324d (see FIG. 3) for arranging springs 362b and 362d described later on both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the Y direction minus side.
  • gel-like damping members covering the springs 362a to 362d may be arranged in the spring arrangement portions 324a to 324d, respectively.
  • the lens unit 33 is disposed in the second accommodation space 320 while being held by a lens guide 361 described later.
  • a lens part 33 has a cylindrical lens barrel and one or more lenses held in the lens barrel.
  • the lens unit 33 includes a telephoto lens group having, for example, an optical triplex or more, which is fixed between the X-direction end of the lens barrel and the X-direction end of the lens barrel.
  • the structure of the lens part 33 is not limited to the above-mentioned structure.
  • the AF device 36 (see FIG. 5) displaces the lens unit 33 in the X direction for the purpose of autofocus.
  • the AF device 36 includes a lens guide 361, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) springs 362a to 362d, an FPC 363, and a pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b.
  • the lens guide 361 (see FIGS. 11 and 16) has a housing space capable of holding the lens barrel. Such a lens guide 361 is disposed in the above-described second accommodation space 320 in a state where displacement in the X direction (that is, the direction of the second optical axis) and the Y direction is possible.
  • the lens guide 361 has a pair of first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b (see FIG. 11) for holding AF magnets 365a and 365b of a pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b described later.
  • the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b are disposed in the magnet spaces 322g and 322h of the second base 32, respectively.
  • the lens guide 361 has a pair of second magnet holding portions 368a and 368b (see FIG. 11) for holding second magnets 371a and 371b of a pair of second actuators 370a and 370b described later.
  • the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a and 368b respectively overlap with the coil placement portions 322d and 322e of the second base 32 with a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • [spring] A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) springs 362 a to 362 d (see FIGS. 12, 13, and 17) elastically support the lens guide 361 on the second base 32. In this state, the lens unit 33 can be displaced in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the second base 32.
  • the spring 362a supports the end of the lens guide 361 on the X direction + side and the Y direction + side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 12).
  • the spring 362b supports the end of the lens guide 361 on the X direction + side and the Y direction ⁇ side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 13).
  • the spring 362c supports the end of the lens guide 361 on the X direction ⁇ side and the Y direction + side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 12).
  • the spring 362d supports the end of the lens guide 361 on the X direction side and the Y direction side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 13).
  • Each of the springs 362a to 362d has a first fixing portion 362f, a second fixing portion 362g, and an elastic deformation portion 362h (see FIG. 17).
  • FIG. 17 shows the springs 362a to 362d as they are in the assembled state.
  • the first fixed portion 362f is fixed to a lens guide 361 which is a movable side member.
  • the second fixed portion 362g is fixed to the second base 32 that is a fixed side member.
  • the elastic deformation part 362h is continuous with the first fixing part 362f and the second fixing part 362g.
  • the elastic deformation portion 362h is made of a linear member that is bent in a meandering manner, for example.
  • the elastically deformable portion 362h has directionality in the X direction.
  • the above-described springs 362a to 362d are arranged with the same directionality in the X direction of the elastic deformation portion 362h.
  • the line segment connecting the centers of the spring 362d of the spring 362a disposed in diagonal positions of the lens guide 361 as viewed from the Z direction and L 1 spring the line segment connecting the centers of the spring 362c of the 362b in the case of the L 2, (also referred to as a center position of the distributed.) intersection between L 1 and L 2 is, of the movable portion in the reference position the center of gravity G Match or nearly match.
  • the movable portion refers to the lens guide 361 and each member fixed to the lens guide 361 and capable of being displaced together with the lens guide 361.
  • the movable portion includes the lens guide 361, the lens portion 33, the AF magnets 365a and 365b of the pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b, and the second actuators 370a and 370b described later.
  • Two magnets 371a and 371b and shield plates 6a and 6b are included.
  • the center of each spring is, for example, the center position in the Z direction and the center position in the X direction of each spring.
  • the reference position of the lens guide 361 refers to a state in which the lens guide 361 is not displaced in the X direction by the autofocus function and a state in which the lens guide 361 is not displaced in the Y direction by the second shake correction device 37 described later. With this configuration, resonance of the lens guide 361 around the straight line L 3 centroid parallel to the street and Z direction of the movable portion can be reduced.
  • the springs 362a to 362d as described above are arranged as follows.
  • a straight line passing through the center of gravity G and parallel to the direction of the second optical axis that is, the X direction
  • L 4 straight line
  • the pair of springs 362a and 362b on the X direction + side are and symmetrically with respect to L 4, it is arranged at a predetermined distance apart two positions in the X-direction positive side from the center of gravity G (right side in FIG. 17).
  • X-direction - the side of the pair of springs 362c, 362d are symmetrical with respect to the straight line L 4, and, X-direction from the center of gravity G - arranged at the predetermined distance apart two positions (the left side in FIG. 17) side The
  • the intersection between the straight line L 1 and the straight line L 2 coincides with the center of gravity G.
  • the FPC 363 (see FIGS. 11 and 18) is a flexible printed circuit board and is fixed to the second base 32. Such an FPC 363 supplies electric power to, for example, an AF device 36 and second actuators 370a and 370b of the second shake correction device 37 which will be described later.
  • the FPC 363 is a continuous flexible printed circuit board, and includes a pair of first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b and a pair of second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e.
  • an AF coil 366a (see FIG. 11) of the AF device 36 is fixed via a substrate 7a. In this state, the first coil fixing portion 363 a and the AF coil 366 a are disposed in the bottom surface through-hole 321 a of the second base 32.
  • the AF coil 366b (see FIG. 11) of the AF device 36 is fixed to the first coil fixing portion 363b via the substrate 7b.
  • the first coil fixing portion 363b and the AF coil 366b are disposed in the bottom surface through hole 321b of the second base 32.
  • the above-described substrates 7a and 7b are fixed to the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b with solder.
  • the FPC reinforcing plate is provided on the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b
  • the above-described substrates 7a and 7b are omitted, and the AF coils 366a and 366b are directly provided on the FPC 363. You can also.
  • soldering between the boards 7a and 7b and the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b is also unnecessary.
  • the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e respectively overlap the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b with a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • Second coils 372a and 372b of a second shake correction device 37 to be described later are fixed to the surfaces of the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e, respectively (see FIG. 11).
  • the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e are respectively placed on the surfaces of the coil placement portions 322d and 322e of the second base 32.
  • Each of the pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b is a third actuator for autofocus.
  • the Y direction + side AF actuator 364a includes an AF magnet 365a and an AF coil 366a.
  • the Y direction negative side AF actuator 364b includes an AF magnet 365b, an AF coil 366b, and an AF Hall element 367.
  • the AF magnets 365a and 365b are fixed to the lens guide 361 which is a movable side member, and the AF coils 366a and 366b are fixed to the second base 32 which is a fixed side member. It is a moving magnet type actuator fixed via the.
  • the AF actuators 364a and 364b may be moving coil actuators. Since the structure of each part constituting such AF actuators 364a and 364b is substantially the same as a conventionally known structure, detailed description thereof is omitted. Hereinafter, the arrangement of the respective parts constituting the AF actuators 364a and 364b will be described.
  • the AF magnets 365a and 365b are held by the first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b of the lens guide 361, respectively. In this state, the AF magnets 365a and 365b are disposed in the magnet spaces 322g and 322h (see FIG. 11) of the second base 32, respectively. In this embodiment, the AF magnets 365a and 365b are each magnetized in the Z direction and have two magnetic poles on one side.
  • the AF coils 366a and 366b are so-called air-core coils having an oval shape.
  • the AF coils 366a and 366b are fixed to the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b of the FPC 363 via the substrates 7a and 7b in a state where the long axis coincides with the Y direction.
  • the AF hall element 367 is disposed inside the AF coil 366b in the radial direction.
  • the AF actuators 364a and 364b configured as described above, when a current flows through the AF coils 366a and 366b through the FPC 363 under the control of an autofocus control unit (not shown), the AF magnets 365a and A Lorentz force is generated that displaces 365b in the X direction. Since the AF magnets 365a and 365b are fixed to the lens guide 361, the lens guide 361 is displaced in the X direction (also referred to as a third direction) based on the Lorentz force. Note that the direction of displacement of the lens guide 361 is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the AF coils 366a and 366b. In this way, autofocus is performed.
  • the resonance of the lens guide 361 around the straight line L 3 is reduced by devising the arrangement of the springs 362a to 362d and the lens guide 361.
  • the lens guide 361 is swung in a direction to cancel the resonance by making a difference between the driving force of the AF actuator 364a and the driving force of the AF actuator 364b. Also good. Note that, by making the currents flowing through the AF actuators 364a and 364b different, the driving force between the AF actuators 364a and 364b can be made different.
  • the second shake correction device 37 (see FIG. 5) performs shake correction in the Y direction by displacing the lens unit 33 in the Y direction (also referred to as the second direction). Such a second shake correction device 37 is arranged in the above-described second accommodation space 320 (see FIG. 4).
  • the second shake correction device 37 includes the lens guide 361 described above, the plurality of springs 362a to 362d described above, the FPC 363 described above, and a pair of second actuators 370a and 370b.
  • the lens guide 361, the springs 362a to 362d, and the FPC 363 are common to the AF device 36.
  • the second actuator 370a (see FIG. 11) on the Y direction + side is arranged in a state of being overlapped with a predetermined interval in the Z direction (also referred to as the first direction) with respect to the AF actuator 364a.
  • Such a second actuator 370a has a second magnet 371a and a second coil 372a.
  • the second actuator 370b on the Y direction minus side is arranged in a state of being overlapped with the above-described AF actuator 364b at a predetermined interval in the Z direction (also referred to as the first direction).
  • a second actuator 370b includes a second magnet 371b, a second coil 372b, and a second Hall element 373.
  • the centers of the driving forces of the second actuators 370a and 370b coincide with the centers of the driving forces of the AF actuators 364a and 364b.
  • This configuration makes it difficult for the lens guide 361 to be tilt-displaced (that is, swinging displacement about an axis parallel to the X direction or the Y direction) during autofocus and shake correction.
  • the second magnets 371a and 371b are fixed to the lens guide 361 which is a movable member, and the second coils 372a and 372b are fixed to the second base 32 which is a fixed member.
  • This is a moving magnet type actuator fixed via an FPC 363.
  • the second actuators 370a and 370b may be moving coil type actuators.
  • each part constituting the second actuators 370a and 370b Since the structure of each part constituting the second actuators 370a and 370b is almost the same as a conventionally known structure, detailed description thereof is omitted. Hereinafter, the arrangement of each part constituting the second actuators 370a and 370b will be described.
  • the second magnets 371a and 371b are held by the second magnet holding portions 368a and 368b of the lens guide 361, respectively.
  • the second magnets 371a and 371b are each magnetized in the Z direction and have two magnetic poles on one side.
  • the second coils 372a and 372b are so-called air-core coils each having an oval shape.
  • the second coils 372a and 372b are respectively fixed to the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e of the FPC 363 in a state where the long axis coincides with the X direction.
  • the second coils 372a and 372b respectively overlap the second magnets 371a and 371b with a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • the second Hall element 373 is fixed on the surface of the second coil fixing portion 363e of the FPC 363 and on the outer side in the radial direction of the second coil 372b. Note that the second Hall element 373 may be arranged inside the second coil 372b in the radial direction.
  • the second actuators 370a and 370b having the above-described configuration
  • a current flows through the second coils 372a and 372b through the FPC 363 under the control of a shake correction controller (not shown)
  • the second magnet Lorentz force that displaces 371a and 371b in the Y direction is generated. Since the second magnets 371a and 371b are respectively fixed to the lens guide 361, the lens guide 361 is displaced in the Y direction based on the Lorentz force.
  • the direction of displacement of the lens guide 361 is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the second coils 372a and 372b.
  • Magnetic metal shield plates 6a and 6b are arranged in the portion.
  • the reference member 38 (see FIGS. 12 and 19) is a plate-like member fixed to the end portion on the X direction + side of the second base 32.
  • the side surface on the + X direction side of the reference member 38 becomes a reference surface in the X direction of the image sensor module 4 described later.
  • a through hole 38 a that guides the light that has passed through the lens portion 33 to the imaging element module 4 is formed in the central portion of the reference member 38.
  • a pair of stopper portions 380a and 380b are provided on the side surface on the X direction side of the reference member 38 to restrict the displacement of the lens portion 33 on the X direction + side during autofocusing to a predetermined range.
  • the end surfaces on the X direction ⁇ side of the stopper portions 380a and 380b (hereinafter simply referred to as “stopper surfaces”) are in the state where the lens guide 361 is at the reference position, as shown in FIG. It faces a part of the X-direction with a predetermined interval.
  • each of the stopper surfaces faces the end surface on the X direction + side of the first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b of the lens guide 361 (hereinafter referred to as “first stoppered surface”) in the X direction. is doing.
  • first stoppered surface the first stopper surface comes into contact with the stopper surface.
  • the displacement in the Y direction + side is regulated within a predetermined range.
  • the lens guide 361 has an X-direction end surface (hereinafter referred to as “second stoppered surface”) of the first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b of the lens guide 361, the second stoppered surface and the X direction.
  • the displacement on the negative side in the Y direction is restricted to a predetermined range by a part of the second base 32 (also referred to as a second stopper surface) that faces the surface.
  • the lens guide 361 has its displacement in the Y direction restricted within a predetermined range by both end surfaces of the first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b in the Y direction and the pair of second side wall portions 322a and 322b of the second base 32. Yes.
  • the displacement of the lens guide 361 in the Z direction + side is regulated within a predetermined range by the end surface on the Z direction + side of the lens guide 361 and the second cover 31. Further, the displacement of the lens guide 361 in the Z direction-side is restricted to a predetermined range by the end surface of the lens guide 361 in the Z direction-side and the bottom surface portion 321 of the second base 32.
  • positioning part 324a (refer FIG. 2, 3) which can arrange
  • a spring arrangement part 324b is formed in which the spring 362b can be arranged on the Y direction minus side from the stopper part 380b.
  • Gel-shaped damping members that cover the springs 362a and 362b may be disposed in the spring placement portions 324a and 324b, respectively.
  • the image sensor module 4 is arranged on the X direction + side with respect to the lens unit 33.
  • the imaging element module 4 includes an imaging element such as a charge-coupled device (CCD) type image sensor or a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) type image sensor.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • the image sensor of the image sensor module 4 captures the subject image formed by the lens unit 33 and outputs an electrical signal corresponding to the subject image.
  • a printed wiring board (not shown) is electrically connected to the substrate (not shown) of the imaging element module 4, and the power supplied to the imaging element module 4 and the subject imaged by the imaging element module 4 through the printed wiring board.
  • An image electrical signal is output.
  • Such an image pickup device module 4 can employ a conventionally known structure.
  • the first actuator 244 of the first shake correction device 24 is provided in the prism module 2.
  • the first actuator 244 is arranged on the back side (that is, the Z direction-side) of the prism 23 so as to overlap the prism 23 in the Z direction (that is, the direction of the first optical axis). Accordingly, camera actuators are not arranged around the prism 23 in the X direction and the Y direction. For this reason, the freedom degree of design in the circumference of the X direction of the prism 23 and the circumference of the Y direction can be improved. Such an improvement in design freedom contributes to the miniaturization of the prism module 2 in the X direction and the Y direction.
  • the pair of second actuators 370 a and 370 b that are driving devices of the second shake correction device 37 overlap the pair of AF actuators 364 a and 364 b with a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Arranged in a state. Such an arrangement contributes to miniaturization of the lens module 3 in the X direction and the Y direction.
  • a camera mounting device (smartphone M in the case of illustration) equipped with a dual camera composed of a wide-angle camera OC1 and a telephoto camera OC2 as shown in FIG. 22 is known.
  • the wide-angle camera OC1 is disposed on the X direction-side (left side in FIG. 22B) of the telephoto camera OC2.
  • the camera module 1 of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 1A and 4 is a telephoto camera OC2
  • the wide-angle camera OC1 is closer to the X direction-side than the camera module 1 (the left side of FIGS. 1A and 4).
  • the smartphone M also includes a control unit (not shown) that controls the wide-angle camera OC1 and the telephoto camera OC2. Note that the wide-angle camera OC1 may be arranged closer to the Y direction + side (front side in FIG. 4) than the camera module 1.
  • the first actuator 244 of the camera module 1 is disposed on the Z direction-side of the prism 23 far from the wide-angle camera OC1. Therefore, when applied to the above-described dual camera, the camera module 1 according to the present embodiment can suppress the occurrence of crosstalk with the actuator of the wide-angle camera OC1.
  • the first actuator 244 is disposed at a position far from the actuator of the wide-angle camera OC1, and thus the wide-angle camera OC1 and It is possible to prevent crosstalk.
  • the second actuators 370a and 370b of the second shake correction device 37 are arranged on the Z direction + side, and the AF actuators 364a and 364b of the AF device 36 are arranged on the Z direction ⁇ side.
  • the second actuators 370a and 370b of the device 37 may be disposed on the negative side in the Z direction, and the AF actuators 364a and 364b of the AF device 36 may be disposed on the positive side in the Z direction.
  • the camera module 1 of the present embodiment includes the prism module 2 and the lens module 3 described above at the same time.
  • the prism module 2 and the lens module 3 described above are not necessarily performed at the same time. That is, a camera module including one of the prism module 2 and the lens module 3 can be implemented. Further, a part of the configuration may be taken out from the prism module 2 or the lens module 3 described above.
  • Embodiment 2 20 and 21 are perspective views showing a camera module 1a according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
  • the camera module 1a according to the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in the structure of an urging mechanism that presses the holder 241 of the prism module 2a in the Z direction-side (that is, the direction toward the first base 22).
  • Other structures of the camera module 1a are the same as those of the first embodiment. For this reason, hereinafter, the structure of the camera module 1a according to the present embodiment will be described focusing on the structure of the portion different from that of the first embodiment.
  • the prism module 2a of the camera module 1a does not have the holding spring 242 (see FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 10) that the prism module 2 of Embodiment 1 has. Instead, the prism module 2a has a rectangular annular yoke 26 made of magnetic metal and fixed to the back surface of the FPC 25 fixed to the back side surface of the first base 22 (that is, the surface on the Z direction side).
  • the shape of the yoke 26 is not limited to the case of this embodiment.
  • the holder 241 is formed based on the magnetic force in the attracting direction generated between the first magnet 244a fixed to the back side surface of the holder 241 (that is, the Z direction-side surface) and the yoke 26. , Pressed against the first base 22. Thereby, the holder 241 is positioned in the Z direction.
  • the holder 241 when the first actuator 244 is de-energized, the holder 241 returns to the initial position on the basis of the magnetic force generated between the first magnet 244a and the yoke 26 in the mutually attracting direction. To do.
  • Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
  • Embodiment 3 A camera module according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the structure of the prism module 2b is different from that of the first embodiment.
  • the structure of the portion that supports the holder 241A in a swingable manner with respect to a first base 22a described later is different from that of the first embodiment.
  • the structure of the lens module is the same as that of the first embodiment.
  • the structure of the camera module according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the structure of parts different from the first embodiment.
  • the prism module 2b of the camera module according to the present embodiment includes a first cover 21, a first base 22a, a prism 23, and a first shake correction device 24a.
  • the structures of the first cover 21 and the prism 23 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the first base 22a is a box-like member having an opening on the Z direction + side and the X direction + side, respectively, as in the first base 22 of the first embodiment.
  • a base first opening 220 (see FIG. 25) is formed in the bottom wall portion 229 on the negative side in the Z direction of the first base 22a.
  • a first coil 244c and a first hall element 244e of a first actuator 244A described later, and a spacer 246 described later are disposed in the base first opening 220.
  • the first base 22a supports a holder 241A (see FIGS. 23, 28, and 29) of a first shake correction device 24a, which will be described later, so as to be able to swing around a first axis parallel to the Y direction.
  • the first base 22a has a first receiving portion 225c and a second receiving portion 225d (see FIG. 26) for holding a swing guide member 245 described later.
  • the first receiving part 225c is provided on the first side wall part 224a on the + Y direction side of the first base 22a.
  • the second receiving part 225d is provided on the first side wall part 224b on the Y direction minus side of the first base 22a.
  • the first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d have a shape that is symmetrical with respect to the Y direction. Specifically, each of the first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d has a substantially V-shaped cutout shape that opens in the Z direction + side when viewed in the Y direction.
  • first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d are respectively closed at the center of the first base 22a in the Y direction by the stopper surfaces 225e and 225f.
  • first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d each open on the outer side in the Y direction (also referred to as the width direction) of the first base 22a.
  • a first positioning convex portion 226a and a second positioning convex portion 227a are provided on the end surfaces on the Z direction + side of the first side wall portions 224a and 224b, respectively.
  • the first positioning protrusions 226a and the second positioning protrusions 227a engage with a pair of swing support springs 243 (see FIGS. 27 and 30) described later to position the pair of swing support springs 243.
  • the first shake correction device 24a swings the prism 23 around the first axis parallel to the Y direction, and performs shake correction in the rotational direction around the first axis. Do.
  • Such a first shake correction device 24a is disposed in the first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 25).
  • the first shake correction device 24a includes a pair of swing guide members 245, a pair of swing support springs 243, a spacer 246, a holder 241A, and a first actuator 244A.
  • the holder 241A is swingably supported by the first base 22a. In this state, the holder 241A swings around the first axis based on the driving force of the first actuator 244A.
  • the first actuator 244A is driven under the control of a control unit (not shown), the holder 241A and the prism 23 swing around the first axis. Thereby, the shake in the rotational direction around the first axis is corrected.
  • a specific structure of each member included in the first shake correction device 24a will be described.
  • the pair of swing guide members 245 are, for example, ceramic, metal, and synthetic resin spheres.
  • One of the pair of swing guide members 245 (that is, the Y direction + side) swing guide member 245 is disposed in the first receiving portion 225c of the first base 22a.
  • the other (that is, the Y direction minus side) swing guide member 245 is disposed in the second receiving portion 225d of the first base 22a.
  • one swing guide member 245 contacts the first receiving portion 225c, and the other swing guide member 245 contacts the second receiving portion 225d at two locations.
  • the Z direction + side half of the pair of swing guide members 245 is a swing guide surface 245a (also referred to as a swing guide portion).
  • the swing guide surface 245a protrudes in the Z direction + side from the first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d.
  • each swing guide surface 245a is a portion other than the first positioning convex portion 226a and the second positioning convex portion 227a on the end surface on the Z direction + side of the first side wall portions 224a and 224b. It is located on the Z direction + side.
  • the swing guide member 245 is not limited to a sphere, and may be, for example, a hemisphere, a cylinder, or a half cylinder. Further, the swing guide member 245 may be integrated with the first base 22a. That is, the swing guide member may be configured by a part of the first base 22a.
  • the pair of swing support springs 243 support a holder 241A, which will be described later, so as to be swingable with respect to the first base 22a.
  • Each of the pair of swing support springs 243 is a metal leaf spring and is disposed on the Z direction + side of the pair of swing guide members 245.
  • the other swing support spring 243 (that is, the Y direction minus side) is symmetrical with the other swing support spring 243 in the Y direction.
  • one swing support spring 243 has a pair of first locking portions 243a and 243b, a second locking portion 243c, a torsion allowing portion 243g, and a spring side guide surface 243h.
  • first locking portion 243a is provided at an end of the one swing support spring 243 on the X direction + side.
  • One such first locking portion 243a has a first through hole 243d.
  • the first locking portion 243b on the other side (that is, the X direction minus side) is provided at the end on the X direction minus side of the one swing support spring 243.
  • the other first locking portion 243b has a first through hole 243e.
  • the pair of first locking portions 243a and 243b are continued by a continuous portion 243i extending in the X direction.
  • the Z direction-side surfaces of the pair of first locking portions 243a and 243b are bonded and fixed to the Z direction + side end surfaces of the first side wall portion 224a of the first base 22a.
  • the first positioning protrusions 226a and 227a of the first base 22a are inserted through the first through holes 243d and 243e, respectively.
  • the Z direction minus side surfaces of the pair of first locking portions 243a and 243b are in the Z direction on the first side wall portion 224b of the first base 22a. Bonded and fixed to the + side end face.
  • locking part 243c is provided in the part in the X direction of 1st latching
  • the second locking portion 243c has a pair of second through holes 243f.
  • the surface on the Z direction + side of the second locking portion 243c is bonded and fixed to a spring seat surface 241s (see FIG. 32) of a holder 241A described later.
  • the pair of holder-side positioning convex portions 241u (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241A are inserted through the pair of second through holes 243f, respectively.
  • the Z-direction + side surface of the second locking portion 243c is bonded and fixed to the spring seat surface 241t of the holder 241A.
  • the twist allowable portion 243g is a plate-like member extending in the Y direction, and is continuous with the intermediate portion in the X direction of the continuous portion 243i and the second locking portion 243c. Such a twist allowing portion 243g allows the second locking portion 243c to twist with respect to the first locking portions 243a and 243b by being twisted.
  • the torsion permitting portion 243g allows relative displacement in the Z direction between the first locking portions 243a and 243b and the second locking portion 243c by elastic deformation.
  • the spring side guide surface 243h is configured by the back surface of the second locking portion 243c (that is, the surface on the Z direction side). Such a spring-side guide surface 243h abuts on the swing guide surface 245a of the swing guide member 245.
  • the pair of swing support springs 243 are plate members that are entirely flat in a free state (also referred to as a non-assembled state). On the other hand, in the assembled state, the pair of swing support springs 243 is configured such that the second locking portion 243c is positioned more on the Z direction + side than the first locking portions 243a and 243b based on the elastic deformation of the torsion allowing portion 243g. (See FIG. 31).
  • the torsion allowing portion 243g is elastically deformed so as to be directed toward the Z direction + side toward the second locking portion 243c. Based on such elastic deformation, the spring-side guide surfaces 243h of the pair of swing support springs 243 bias the swing guide member 245 toward the Z direction-side.
  • the spacer 246 is disposed in a bottom groove 229a (see FIGS. 26 and 29) formed in the Z direction-side surface (that is, the bottom surface) of the bottom wall portion 229 of the first base 22a. Such a spacer 246 prevents the first magnet 244f and the first coil 244c from colliding in the Z direction.
  • the spacer 246 is a plate-like member and has a spacer-side through hole 246a in which a first coil 244c of a first actuator 244A to be described later can be disposed.
  • a part of the spacer 246 is disposed between a first coil 244c of the first actuator 244A described later and the base first opening 220 (see FIGS. 25 and 26).
  • the Z direction + side surface (also referred to as a collision prevention surface) of the portion (also referred to as a collision prevention portion) arranged around the first coil 244c in the spacer 246 is the surface on the Z direction + side of the first coil 244c. Rather than the Z direction + side (see FIG. 25).
  • the anti-collision surface is opposed to the anti-collision protrusions 241m, 241n, and 241p (see FIGS. 25 and 32) of the holder 241A described later in the Z direction.
  • a gap in the Z direction that exists between the collision prevention surface and the collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p exists between the first magnet 244f and the first coil 244c of the first actuator 244A. It is smaller than the gap in the Z direction.
  • the collision preventing convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are applied to the spacer 246 before the first magnet 244f contacts the first coil 244c. Abut. Thereby, the collision between the first magnet 244f and the first coil 244c is prevented.
  • the spacer 246 may be omitted. Although illustration is omitted, when the spacer 246 is omitted, a part of the surface (that is, the surface) on the Z direction + side of the bottom wall portion 229 of the first base 22a (also referred to as a collision preventing surface) is the first.
  • the coil 244c is positioned closer to the Z direction + side than the Z direction + side surface.
  • the positions of the collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p (see FIGS. 25 and 32) of the holder 241A described later are adjusted, and the collision prevention surface and the collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are arranged in the Z direction. Make them face each other. Thereby, the contact between the first magnet 244f and the first coil 244c is prevented.
  • the holder 241A (see FIGS. 29 and 32) is made of, for example, synthetic resin, and holds the prism 23 in a swingable state with respect to the first base 22a.
  • the holder 241A includes a placement surface 241a, a pair of opposing wall portions 241f, 241g, a plurality of collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, 241p, and a pair of overhang portions 241q, 241r.
  • the structure of the mounting surface 241a and the pair of opposing wall portions 241f is substantially the same as that of the holder 241 of the first embodiment.
  • the plurality of collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are respectively provided at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the back surface (that is, the surface in the Z direction-side) of the holder 241A.
  • the position of the collision prevention convex part is not limited to the position of this embodiment.
  • the tip surfaces (that is, the end surface on the Z direction side) of the collision preventing convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are located on the Z direction side with respect to the other parts of the holder 241A.
  • the front end surfaces of the collision preventing convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are opposed to the surface of the spacer 246 (that is, the surface in the Z direction + side) through a gap in the Z direction.
  • the pair of overhang portions 241q and 241r are provided on the pair of opposing wall portions 241f and 241g, respectively. Each of the pair of overhang portions 241q and 241r supports the holder 241A so as to be swingable with respect to the first base 22a.
  • one (that is, the Y direction + side) overhanging portion 241q is provided on the Y direction + side surface of the opposing wall portion 241f so as to protrude from the side surface to the Y direction + side.
  • the other (that is, Y direction-side) overhanging portion 241r protrudes from the side surface to the Y direction-side of the opposing wall portion 241g.
  • the pair of overhang portions 241q and 241r have flat spring-shaped spring seat surfaces 241s and 241t on the back surface (that is, the surface in the Z direction-side), respectively.
  • a pair of holder-side positioning projections 241u protruding in the Z direction-side are formed at two locations spaced apart in the X direction of the spring seat surfaces 241s and 241t.
  • the surfaces of the second locking portions 243c of the pair of swing support springs 243 are bonded and fixed to the spring seat surfaces 241s and 241t, respectively.
  • the pair of holder-side positioning protrusions 241u are inserted through the pair of second through holes 243f of the swing support spring 243, respectively.
  • the holder 241A is swingably supported with respect to the first base 22a.
  • the first actuator 244A swings the holder 241A about the first axis.
  • the first axis is a Y axis that passes through a contact portion between the swing guide surface 245a of the pair of swing guide members 245 and the spring side guide surface 243h of the pair of swing support springs 243. Parallel straight lines.
  • the first actuator 244A is disposed on the back side of the prism 23 and the holder 241A so as to overlap the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 and the holder 241A in the Z direction (that is, the direction of the first optical axis). That is, it is arranged on the Z direction minus side. Note that also in the present embodiment, the direction of the first optical axis corresponds to the first direction.
  • the first actuator 244A includes the first magnet 244f, the first coil 244c, and the first Hall element 244e.
  • the first magnet 244f is fixed to the back side surface of the holder 241A which is a movable side member (that is, the surface on the Z direction side).
  • the first magnet 244f is composed of two magnet elements adjacent in the X direction. Each of these magnet elements is magnetized in the Z direction and has one magnetic pole on one side. The direction of the magnetic pole of each magnet element is opposite to each other.
  • the non-magnetized portion at the center in the X direction of the first magnet 244f can be reduced as compared with the structure having two magnetic poles on one side as in the first embodiment.
  • the first coil 244c and the first Hall element 244e are fixed to the surface of the flexible printed circuit board (hereinafter referred to as FPC) 25 (that is, the surface in the Z direction + side) fixed to the back side surface of the first base 22a. .
  • FPC flexible printed circuit board
  • the first coil 244c and the first hall element 244e are disposed in the base first opening 220 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the first base 22a.
  • the first coil 244c is a so-called air-core coil having an oval shape.
  • the first hall element 244e is disposed inside the first coil 244c in the radial direction.
  • a spacer 246 is disposed outside the first coil 244c.
  • the first actuator 244A having the above configuration swings the holder 241A around the first axis under the control of a camera shake correction control unit (not shown), as in the first embodiment.
  • the first actuator 244A When the current flows through the first coil 244c, the first actuator 244A generates a Lorentz force that displaces the first magnet 244f in the X direction. Since the first magnet 244f is fixed to the holder 241A, a force for displacing the holder 241A in the X direction (for example, the direction of arrow F in FIG. 31) acts on the holder 241A based on the Lorentz force.
  • the spring-side guide surfaces 243h of the pair of swing support springs 243 fixed to the holder 241A have the swing guide surfaces 245a of the pair of swing guide members 245 in the Z direction minus side (see FIG. 31 is pressed in the direction) of the arrow Z a of.
  • each torsion allowing portion 243g of the pair of swing support springs 243 is twisted so as to allow the inclination of each spring side guide surface 243h.
  • the holder 241A swings around the first axis.
  • the direction of displacement of the holder 241A is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the first coil 244c.
  • the holder 241A returns to the initial position based on the elastic force of the pair of swing support springs 243.
  • the initial position of the holder 241A is a state where the holder 241A is not swinging.
  • Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
  • Embodiment 4 A camera module according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the structure of the lens module is different from that of the first embodiment.
  • the structures of the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d and the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d constituting the lens module are different from those of the first embodiment.
  • the structure of the AF magnets 365a and 365b, the arrangement of the AF hall element 367a, and the newly provided second AF magnets 369a and 369b are implemented. Different from Form 1. Further, in the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d, the structures of the second magnets 371c and 371d and the arrangement of the second Hall elements 373 are different from those of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing only the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d and the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d.
  • the structure of the lens guide is also different from the lens guide 361 (see FIGS. 11 and 16) of the first embodiment.
  • the structure of the lens guide will be briefly described together with the description of the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d and the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d.
  • the structure of the lens module other than the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d, the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d, and the lens guide is substantially the same as the lens module 3 of the first embodiment.
  • the structure of the prism module is the same as that of the first to third embodiments.
  • the structure of the camera module according to the present embodiment will be described focusing on the structure of parts different from the first embodiment.
  • AF actuator 364c and 364d are third actuators for autofocus.
  • One (that is, the Y direction + side) AF actuator 364c includes an AF magnet 365a, an AF coil 366a, and an AF second magnet 369a.
  • the other (ie, Y direction-side) AF actuator 364d includes an AF magnet 365b, an AF coil 366b, an AF hall element 367a, and an AF second magnet 369b.
  • the structure and arrangement of the AF magnets 365a and 365b and the AF coils 366a and 366b are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the AF hall element 367a. Therefore, the description of the same structure as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the structure and arrangement of the AF hall element 367a and the AF second magnet 369b in the other AF actuator 364d will be described.
  • the AF hall element 367a of the other AF actuator 364d incorporates a device driver for the AF apparatus.
  • Such an AF hall element 367a is disposed in the vicinity of the AF coil 366b and closer to the X direction minus side than the AF coil 366b.
  • AF Hall element 367a is directly fixed to FPC (not shown) by solder. Further, a reinforcing plate (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the portion where the AF hall element 367a is fixed in the FPC (not shown). The AF hall element 367a may be fixed to the FPC via a substrate (not shown). In this case, the reinforcing plate may be omitted.
  • the second AF magnet 369b is a magnet different from the AF magnet 365b. Specifically, the second magnet for AF 369b has a magnetization direction in the Z direction and one magnetic pole on one side.
  • the second AF magnet 369b faces the AF hall element 367a in the Z direction in the vicinity of the AF magnet 365b and in the X direction-side.
  • the AF second magnet 369b increases the magnetic flux density that passes through the AF hall element 367a.
  • the second AF magnet 369b is also held by a holding portion provided in a lens guide (not shown).
  • one (that is, the Y direction + side) second actuator 370c has a predetermined interval in the Z direction with respect to one (that is, the Y direction + side) AF actuator 364c. Open and face each other.
  • One such second actuator 370 c includes a second magnet 371 c, a second coil 372 a, and a second Hall element 373.
  • the other (ie, Y direction-side) second actuator 370d faces the other (ie, Y direction-side) AF actuator 364d at a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • the other second actuator 370d has a second magnet 371d and a second coil 372b.
  • the structure and arrangement of the second coils 372a and 372b are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the pair of second actuators 370 c and 370 d are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the second Hall element 373. Therefore, the description of the same structure as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the structure and arrangement of the second magnet 371c and the second Hall element 373 in one second actuator 370c will be described below.
  • Each of the second magnets 371c in one second actuator 370c includes two magnet elements adjacent in the Y direction.
  • Each magnet element is a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the X direction, and is magnetized in the Z direction. The direction of the magnetic pole of each magnet element is opposite to each other.
  • Each of the second magnets 371c is held by a holding portion provided in a lens guide (not shown).
  • the second Hall element 373 is provided near the second coil 372a and closer to the Z direction-side than the second coil 372a.
  • the second Hall element 373 is directly fixed to the FPC (not shown) by solder. Such an arrangement mode of the second Hall element 373 enables the second coil 372a to be enlarged. If the large second coil 372a is employed, the output of the second shake correction device 37 increases.
  • Magnetic metal shield plates 6a and 6b are provided between the second magnets 371c and 371d and the AF magnets 365a and 365b in the Z direction. Thereby, crosstalk between the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d and the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d is prevented.
  • Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
  • Embodiment 5 A camera module according to Embodiment 5 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the structure of the lens module is different from that of the first embodiment.
  • the structures of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f, the pair of second actuators 370e and 370f, and the FPC 363A that constitute the lens module are different from those of the first embodiment.
  • the structure and number of AF magnets 365a and 365b, the number of AF coils 366a and 366b, and the arrangement of AF hall elements 367a are different from those of the first embodiment.
  • Each of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is a third actuator for autofocus.
  • One (that is, the Y direction + side) AF actuator 364e includes a pair of AF magnets 365a, a pair of AF coils 366a, and an AF Hall element 367a.
  • the other (ie, Y direction-side) AF actuator 364f includes a pair of AF magnets 365b and a pair of AF coils 366b.
  • the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the AF hall element 367a. Therefore, only the structure and arrangement of one AF actuator 364e will be described below.
  • the pair of AF magnets 365a are adjacent to each other in a state separated in the X direction.
  • Each of the pair of AF magnets 365a may have a structure in which two magnet elements having one magnetic pole on one side are combined.
  • each of the pair of AF magnets 365a may have a structure having two magnetic poles on one side.
  • Each of such a pair of AF magnets 365a is held by a holding portion of a lens guide (not shown).
  • the pair of AF coils 366a are adjacent to each other while being separated in the X direction.
  • the pair of AF coils 366a is disposed on the Z direction minus side of the pair of AF magnets 365a. In this state, the pair of AF coils 366a are opposed to the pair of AF magnets 365a in the Z direction at a predetermined interval.
  • each of the pair of AF coils 366a is an oval so-called air-core coil.
  • Each of the pair of AF coils 366a is directly fixed to the first coil fixing portion 363a of the FPC 363A with the long axis aligned with the Y direction.
  • the 1st reinforcement plate 391a is provided in the back surface of the 1st coil fixing
  • a first reinforcing plate 391b is provided on the back surface of the first coil fixing portion 363b to which the pair of AF coils 366a of the other AF actuator 364f is fixed.
  • a second reinforcing plate 392a made of a nonmagnetic material is provided on the back surface of the first reinforcing plate 391a.
  • a second reinforcing plate 392b made of a nonmagnetic material is provided on the back surface of the first reinforcing plate 391b.
  • the second reinforcing plates 392a and 392b may each be a magnetic material.
  • the magnetic second reinforcing plates 392a and 392b contribute to the improvement of the magnetic flux density that passes through the AF coils 366a and 366b, respectively.
  • the AF hall element 367a incorporates a device driver for the AF apparatus. Such an AF Hall element 367a is disposed between the pair of AF coils 366a. Such an AF Hall element 367a is directly fixed to the surface of the first coil fixing portion 363a of the FPC 363A by solder.
  • pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f may be replaced with the pair of AF actuators 364c and 370d of the fourth embodiment described above.
  • a second actuator 370e has a second magnet 371c, a second coil 372a, and a second Hall element 373.
  • the second actuator 370f on the other side (that is, the Y direction minus side) has a second magnet 371d and a second coil 372b.
  • the structures of the second magnets 371c and 371d, the second coils 372a and 372b, and the second Hall element 373 are the same as those in the fourth embodiment. However, in the case of this embodiment, the arrangement of these members is different from that of the above-described fourth embodiment.
  • the pair of second actuators 370e and 370f are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the second Hall element 373. Therefore, the description of the same parts as those of the above-described fourth embodiment will be omitted, and parts of the second actuator 370e different from those of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described.
  • the second coil 372a of one of the second actuators 370e is provided closer to the Z direction + side than the second magnet 371c.
  • the second coil 372a is fixed to the back surface of the second coil fixing portion 363f of the FPC 363A.
  • a first reinforcing plate 391c is provided on the surface of the second coil fixing portion 363f.
  • a first reinforcing plate 391d is provided on the surface of the second coil fixing portion 363g to which the second coil 372b of the other second actuator 370f is fixed.
  • a second reinforcing plate 392c made of a nonmagnetic material is provided on the surface of the first reinforcing plate 391c.
  • a second reinforcing plate 392d made of a nonmagnetic material is provided on the surface of the first reinforcing plate 391d.
  • the second reinforcing plates 392c and 392d may each be a magnetic body.
  • the magnetic second reinforcing plates 392c and 392d contribute to the improvement of the magnetic flux density passing through the second coils 372a and 372b, respectively.
  • the second Hall element 373 is provided in the vicinity of the second coil 372a and closer to the + X direction than the second coil 372a.
  • a pair of shield plates 6a and 6b made of magnetic metal are disposed between the second magnet 371c and the AF magnet 365a and between the second magnet 371d and the AF magnet 365b in the Z direction. Is done. Thereby, crosstalk between the pair of second actuators 370e and 370f and the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is prevented.
  • Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
  • Embodiment 6 A camera module according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the structure of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is the same as that of Embodiment 5 described above except that the position of the AF hall element 367a is exchanged between the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f. It is almost the same. Therefore, detailed description of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is omitted.
  • One of the pair of second actuators 370g and 370h (that is, the Y direction + side) second actuator 370g includes a second magnet 371a, a second coil 372a, and a third magnet 374a.
  • the second actuator 370h on the other side includes a second magnet 371b, a second coil 372b, a second Hall element 373, and a third magnet 374b.
  • the structure and arrangement of the second magnets 371a and 371b and the second coils 372a and 372b are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the pair of second actuators 370g and 370h are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the second Hall element 373. For this reason, the description of the same parts as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the structure and arrangement of the second Hall element 373 and the third magnet 374b in the other second actuator 370h will be described below.
  • the second magnets 371a and 371b may have a structure in which two magnet elements having one magnetic pole on one side are combined. Alternatively, the second magnets 371a and 371b may have a structure having two magnetic poles on one side.
  • the second Hall element 373 of the other second actuator 370h is disposed closer to the Z direction-side and the X direction-side than the second coil 372b. Such a second Hall element 373 is fixed to an FPC (not shown).
  • the third magnet 374b of the other second actuator 370h is a magnet different from the second magnet 371a. Specifically, the third magnet 374b is magnetized in the Y direction and has one magnetic pole on one side. Such a third magnet 374 b is arranged on the Z direction ⁇ side of the second Hall element 373 and is opposed to the second Hall element 373 in the Z direction. The third magnet 374b is held by a holding portion provided in a lens guide (not shown).
  • magnetic metal shield plates (also called yokes) 6a and 6b are arranged at positions adjacent to the Z direction + side of the second magnets 371a and 371b. Such shield plates 6a and 6b function as yokes of the second magnets 371a and 371b.
  • Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
  • Embodiment 7 The camera module according to Embodiment 7 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the structure of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is substantially the same as that of the fifth embodiment.
  • the second actuator 370i on the Y direction + side includes a pair of second magnets 371a, a second coil 372a, and a second Hall element 373.
  • the second magnet 371a is increased by one compared to the structure of the first embodiment.
  • the structures of these members are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • Each of the pair of second magnets 371a and a pair of second magnets 371b described later may have a structure in which two magnet elements having one magnetic pole on one side are combined.
  • each of the pair of second magnets 371a and the pair of second magnets 371b may have a structure having two magnetic poles on one side.
  • Such a pair of second magnets 371a are arranged so as to sandwich the second coil 372a from the Z direction at a predetermined interval.
  • One (that is, the Z direction + side) second magnet 371a is held by one second magnet holding portion 368a of the lens guide 361A.
  • the second magnet 371a on the negative side in the Z direction is held by one third magnet holding portion 368c of the lens guide 361A.
  • the second actuator 370j on the other side has a pair of second magnets 371b and a second coil 372b. Also in the other second actuator 370j, the second magnet 371b is increased by one as compared with the structure of the first embodiment.
  • the structures of these members are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • Such a pair of second magnets 371b are arranged so as to sandwich the second coil 372b from the Z direction at a predetermined interval.
  • One (that is, the Z direction + side) second magnet 371b is held by the other second magnet holding portion (not shown) of the lens guide 361A.
  • the second magnet 371b on the other side is held by the other third magnet holding portion (not shown) of the lens guide 361.
  • FIGS. 8 A camera module according to Embodiment 8 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the structures of the prism module 2c and the lens module 3a are different from those of the first and third embodiments.
  • the structure of the camera module according to the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first and third embodiments.
  • the prism module 2c of the camera module according to the present embodiment includes a first cover 21 (see FIG. 1A), a first base 22b, a prism 23, and a first shake correction device 24b (see FIGS. 40 and 41).
  • the structures of the first cover 21 and the prism 23 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the first base 22b is a box-shaped member that opens in the Z direction + side and the X direction + side, respectively, as in the first base 22 of the first embodiment.
  • the first base 22b has a base first opening 220 (see FIG. 43) in the bottom wall portion 229b on the Z-direction side.
  • the first coil 244c and the first Hall element 244e of the first actuator 244A are disposed in the base first opening 220.
  • the first base 22b supports the holder 241B (see FIG. 40) of the first shake correction device 24b so that the holder 241B can swing around a first axis parallel to the Y direction.
  • the first base 22b has a first receiving portion 225c1 and a second receiving portion 225d1 (see FIG. 44) for holding the swing guide member 245, as in the third embodiment.
  • the 1st receiving part 225c1 is provided in the 1st side wall part 224a1 of the Y direction + side in the 1st base 22b.
  • the second receiving portion 225d1 is provided on the first side wall portion 224b1 on the Y direction minus side of the first base 22b.
  • the first receiving part 225c1 and the second receiving part 225d1 have a shape symmetrical to each other in the Y direction. Specifically, the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1 are cylindrical recesses that open only on the end surface (upper surface) on the Z direction + side of the first side wall portion 224a1 and the first side wall portion 224b1, respectively. .
  • the first side wall portion 224a1 includes a first dam portion 224c1 (see FIG. 44) between the Y direction inner end edge of the upper surface and the first receiving portion 225c1.
  • the first side wall portion 224b1 includes a first dam portion 224c2 (see FIG. 44) between the Y direction inner end edge of the upper surface and the second receiving portion 225d1.
  • the first dam portion 224c1 and the first dam portion 224c2 are respectively provided with an adhesive that fixes the swing guide member 245 (see FIG. 43) to the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1 toward the center in the Y direction. Contributes to spill prevention.
  • the first side wall portion 224a1 has a second dam portion 224d1 (see FIG. 44) at a portion surrounding a part of the outer half of the first receiving portion 225c1 on the upper side in the Y direction.
  • the first side wall portion 224b1 has a second dam portion 224d2 at a portion surrounding a part of the outer half of the second receiving portion 225d1 on the upper surface in the Y direction.
  • the second dam portion 224d1 and the second dam portion 224d2 contribute to preventing the adhesive that fixes the swing guide member 245 to the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1, respectively, from flowing out to the outside in the Y direction.
  • the first side wall portion 224a1 has spring arrangement spaces 224e1 and 224e2 (see FIG. 44) on the outer side in the Y direction from the second dam portion 224d1 on the upper surface.
  • the spring arrangement space 224e1 and the spring arrangement space 224e2 are separated in the X direction.
  • the first side wall portion 224b1 has spring arrangement spaces 224f1 and 224f2 (see FIG. 44) in the Y direction outer side portion than the second dam portion 224d2 on the upper surface.
  • the spring arrangement space 224f1 and the spring arrangement space 224f2 are separated from each other in the X direction.
  • a part of the continuous portion 243i1 (specifically, the base end side continuous portion 243j1) of the swing support spring 243A (see FIG. 45) described later is arranged. Is done.
  • the first side wall portion 224a1 has three convex portions 224g1, 224g2, and 224g3 in order from the X direction + side on the outer side of the second dam portion 224d1 on the upper surface in the Y direction.
  • the convex part 224g1 and the convex part 224g3 are separated in the X direction and overlap in plan view from the X direction.
  • the convex part 224g2 is located outside the convex part 224g1 and the convex part 224g3 in the Y direction (the lower side in FIG. 44).
  • the spring arrangement space 224e1 is a space existing between the convex portion 224g1 and the convex portion 224g2.
  • the spring arrangement space 224e2 is a space that exists between the convex portion 224g2 and the convex portion 224g3.
  • the first side wall portion 224b1 has three convex portions 224h1, 224h2, and 224h3 in order from the X direction + side on the outer side of the second dam portion 224d2 on the upper surface in the Y direction.
  • the convex portion 224h1 and the convex portion 224h3 are separated in the X direction and overlap in plan view from the Y direction.
  • the convex part 224h2 is located on the outer side in the Y direction (upper side in FIG. 44) than the convex part 224h1 and the convex part 224h3.
  • the spring arrangement space 224f1 is a space that exists between the convex portion 224h1 and the convex portion 224h2.
  • the spring arrangement space 224f2 is a space that exists between the convex portion 224h2 and the convex portion 224h3.
  • Each of the first side wall portions 224a1 and 224b1 has a first positioning convex portion 226a1 and a second positioning convex portion 227a1 (see FIG. 44) at both ends in the X direction on the upper surface.
  • Each of the first positioning convex portion 226a1 and the second positioning convex portion 227a1 engages with a pair of swing support springs 243A (see FIG. 45) described later to position the pair of swing support springs 243A.
  • the first shake correction device 24b swings the prism 23 about the first axis parallel to the Y direction, and rotates around the first axis. Perform shake correction.
  • Such a first shake correction device 24b is disposed in the first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 6).
  • the first shake correction device 24b includes a pair of swing guide members 245 (see FIG. 43), a pair of swing support springs 243A, a holder 241B (see FIG. 42), and a first actuator 244A (see FIG. 43).
  • the holder 241B is swingably supported by the first base 22b. In this state, the holder 241B swings around the first axis based on the driving force of the first actuator 244A.
  • the first actuator 244A is driven under the control of a control unit (not shown), the holder 241B and the prism 23 swing around the first axis. Thereby, the shake in the rotational direction around the first axis is corrected.
  • a specific structure of each member included in the first shake correction device 24b will be described.
  • Each of the pair of swing guide members 245 is, for example, a sphere made of ceramic, metal, or synthetic resin.
  • One of the pair of swing guide members 245 (that is, the Y direction + side) swing guide member 245 is disposed in the first receiving portion 225c1 (see FIG. 44) of the first base 22b.
  • the other (that is, the Y direction minus side) swing guide member 245 is disposed in the second receiving portion 225d1 of the first base 22b.
  • the pair of swing guide members 245 are respectively fixed to the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1 with an adhesive.
  • the Z direction + side half of the pair of swing guide members 245 is a swing guide surface 245a (also referred to as a swing guide portion; see FIG. 23).
  • the swing guide surface 245a protrudes more in the Z direction + side than the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1.
  • each swing guide surface 245a is a portion other than the first positioning convex portion 226a1 and the second positioning convex portion 227a1 on the Z direction + side end surface of the first side wall portions 224a1 and 224b1. It is located on the Z direction + side than (see FIG. 31).
  • the swing guide member 245 is not limited to a sphere, and may be, for example, a hemisphere, a cylinder, or a semi-cylinder. Further, the swing guide member 245 may be integrated with the first base 22b. That is, the swing guide member may be configured by a part of the first base 22b.
  • the pair of swing support springs 243A support a holder 241B described later so as to be swingable with respect to the first base 22b.
  • Each of the pair of swing support springs 243A is a metal leaf spring, and is disposed on the Z direction + side of the pair of swing guide members 245.
  • the other swing support spring 243A (that is, the Y direction minus side) is symmetrical with the other swing support spring 243A in the Y direction.
  • One swing support spring 243A has a pair of first locking portions 243a1, 243b1, a second locking portion 243c1, a torsion allowing portion 243g1, and a spring side guide surface 243h1.
  • first locking portion 243a1 is disposed at an end on the X direction + side of one swing support spring 243A.
  • One such first locking portion 243a1 has a first through hole 243d1.
  • the first locking portion 243b1 on the other side (that is, the X direction minus side) is disposed at the end on the X direction minus side of the one swing support spring 243A.
  • the other first locking portion 243b1 has a first through hole 243e1.
  • the pair of first locking portions 243a1 and 243b1 are continued by a continuous portion 243i1 extending in the X direction.
  • the continuous portion 243i1 has a continuous portion element 243j disposed on the X direction + side with respect to a twist allowing portion 243g1 to be described later, and a continuous portion element 243k disposed on the X direction-side with respect to the twist allowing portion 243g1.
  • the continuous portion element 243j continues the twist allowing portion 243g1 and the first locking portion 243a1.
  • the continuous portion element 243k continues the twist allowing portion 243g1 and the first locking portion 243b1.
  • the continuous portion element 243j has a proximal side continuous portion 243j1 and a meandering continuous portion 243j2.
  • the proximal end side continuous portion 243j1 and the meandering continuous portion 243j2 are continuous.
  • the base end side continuous portion 243j1 is provided at the end portion of the continuous portion element 243j on the side close to the twist allowable portion 243g1.
  • One end of the base end side continuous portion 243j1 (the end portion on the side close to the twist allowable portion 243g1) is continuous with the twist allowable portion 243g1.
  • the meandering continuous portion 243j2 is substantially S-shaped.
  • One end of the meandering continuous portion 243j2 (the end portion on the side close to the twist allowing portion 243g1) is continuous with the proximal-side continuous portion 243j1.
  • the other end of the meandering continuous portion 243j2 (the end portion far from the twist allowing portion 243g1) is continuous with the first locking portion 243a1.
  • the continuous element 243k is symmetrical to the continuous element 243j in the X direction. For this reason, about the continuous part element 243k, the same code
  • the Z-direction-side surfaces of the pair of first locking portions 243a1, 243b1 are bonded and fixed to the Z-direction + -side end surfaces of the first side wall portion 224a1 of the first base 22b.
  • the first positioning protrusions 226a1 and 227a1 of the first base 22b are inserted into the first through holes 243d1 and 243e1, respectively (see FIG. 43).
  • the Z direction minus side surfaces of the pair of first locking portions 243a1 and 243b1 are in the Z direction on the first side wall portion 224b1 of the first base 22b. Bonded and fixed to the + side end face.
  • the second locking portion 243c1 is provided at a portion in the X direction between the first locking portions 243a1 and 243b1 via a gap in the X direction.
  • the second locking portion 243c1 has a pair of second through holes 243f1.
  • the surface on the Z direction + side of the second locking portion 243c1 is bonded and fixed to a spring seat surface 241s (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241B described later.
  • the pair of holder-side positioning protrusions 241u (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241B are inserted into the pair of second through holes 243f1, respectively.
  • the surface on the Z direction + side of the second locking portion 243c1 is adhesively fixed to the spring seat surface 241t (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241B. .
  • the torsion allowing portion 243g1 is a plate-like member extending in the Y direction, and is an intermediate portion in the X direction of the continuous portion 243i1 (specifically, one end of each base end side continuous portion 243j1) and the second locking portion. 243c1 is continued. Such a twist allowing portion 243g1 allows the second locking portion 243c1 to be twisted with respect to the first locking portions 243a1 and 243b1 by being twisted.
  • the torsion allowing portion 243g1 allows relative displacement in the Z direction between the first locking portions 243a1, 243b1 and the second locking portion 243c1 by elastic deformation.
  • the spring side guide surface 243h1 is configured by the back surface of the second locking portion 243c1 (that is, the surface on the Z direction side). Such a spring-side guide surface 243h1 contacts the swing guide surface 245a (see FIG. 31) of the swing guide member 245.
  • the pair of swing support springs 243A are plate members that are entirely flat in a free state (also referred to as a non-assembled state). On the other hand, in the assembled state, the pair of swing support springs 243A has the second locking portion 243c1 positioned closer to the Z direction + side than the first locking portions 243a1, 243b1 based on the elastic deformation of the torsion allowing portion 243g1. (See FIG. 31).
  • the torsion allowing portion 243g1 is elastically deformed so as to be directed toward the Z direction + side toward the second locking portion 243c1. Based on such elastic deformation, the spring-side guide surfaces 243h1 of the pair of swing support springs 243A bias the swing guide member 245 in the Z direction minus side.
  • the base end side continuous portions 243j1 of the pair of swing support springs 243A are disposed in the spring placement spaces 224e1, 224e2 and the spring placement spaces 224f1, 224f2, respectively. Is done. Further, a gel-like damping member 27 is arranged in the spring arrangement spaces 224e1 and 224e2 and the spring arrangement spaces 224f1 and 224f2 so as to cover the proximal end side continuous portion 243j1 (see FIG. 43).
  • the vibration control member 27 is effective in suppressing unnecessary resonance of the pair of swing support springs 243A. From the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessary resonance, it is preferable that the vibration control member 27 is provided near a portion of the pair of swing support springs 243A that is most deformed during use. In the case of the present embodiment, the portion that deforms the most during use is the twist allowing portion 243g1. For this reason, it is preferable that the vibration control member 27 covers a portion of the pair of swing support springs 243A that is close to the twist allowable portion 243g1.
  • the holder 241B (see FIG. 40) is made of, for example, synthetic resin, and holds the prism 23 in a swingable state with respect to the first base 22b.
  • the basic configuration of the holder 241B is substantially the same as the holder 241A (see FIG. 32) of the third embodiment described above.
  • the holder 241B will be described with a configuration different from the holder 241A of the third embodiment.
  • the protruding portions 241q1 and 241r1 of the holder 241B protrude from the pair of opposing wall portions 241f and 241g (see FIG. 32) in the Y direction, and the protruding portions 241q and 241r (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241A of the third embodiment. Smaller than. Therefore, in the assembled state, the positions of both end faces in the Y direction of the holder 241B (that is, the end faces on the outer side in the Y direction of the overhang portions 241q1 and 241r1) are in the Y direction rather than both end faces in the Y direction of the first base 22b. Located on the center side. Such a configuration contributes to reducing the size and weight of the holder 241B.
  • the collision prevention convex portions 241m and 241n are formed on the back surface of the holder 241B (that is, the Z direction-side surface). , 241p (see FIG. 32) are not provided.
  • the structure of the other holder 241B is substantially the same as the holder 241 of the first embodiment or the holder 241A of the third embodiment.
  • the first actuator 244A swings the holder 241B around the first axis.
  • the first axis is a Y axis that passes through a contact portion between the swing guide surface 245a of the pair of swing guide members 245 and the spring side guide surface 243h1 of the pair of swing support springs 243A. Parallel straight lines.
  • the structure of the first actuator 244A is the same as that of the third embodiment described above.
  • Such a first actuator 244A swings the holder 241B around the first axis under the control of a camera shake correction control unit (not shown), as in the third embodiment.
  • the operation when the holder 241B swings around the first axis is the same as that in the third embodiment described above with reference to FIG.
  • the basic configuration of the lens module 3a is substantially the same as the lens module 3 of the first embodiment described above.
  • the lens module 3a will be described with a focus on differences from the lens module 3 of the first embodiment.
  • the lens module 3a includes a second cover 31 (see FIG. 1A), a second base 32A, a lens unit 33, an AF device 36A, a second shake correction device 37A, and a reference member 38.
  • the second cover 31, the lens unit 33, and the reference member 38 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the second base 32A (see FIGS. 46 and 47) is combined with the second cover 31 described above, so that the second accommodation space 320 in which the lens unit 33, the AF device 36A, and the second shake correction device 37A can be disposed. (See FIG. 4).
  • the basic configuration of the second base 32A is substantially the same as the second base 32 of the first embodiment described above. For this reason, hereinafter, the second base 32A will be described focusing on portions different from the second base 32 of the first embodiment.
  • the second side wall portion 322a1 of the second base 32A has spring placement portions 324a1 and 324c1 (see FIG. 46) at both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the Y direction + side.
  • a spring 362a1 and a spring 362c1, which will be described later, are arranged in the spring arrangement part 324a1 and the spring arrangement part 324c1, respectively.
  • the second side wall portion 322a1 of the second base 32A has a slit 322i (see FIG. 46) on the side surface on the Y direction + side.
  • the slit 322i has a space in which a first continuous portion 363i of an FPC 363B (see FIG. 50) described later can be disposed.
  • the space is a space parallel to the ZY plane.
  • the slits 322i open on the Y direction + side and the Z direction both sides.
  • the second side wall portion 322b1 of the second base 32A has spring arrangement portions 324b1 and 324d1 (see FIG. 47) at both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the Y direction side.
  • a spring 362b1 and a spring 362d1, which will be described later, are arranged in the spring arrangement part 324b1 and the spring arrangement part 324d1, respectively.
  • the second side wall portion 322b1 of the second base 32A has a pair of concave portions 322j on the side surface on the Y direction side.
  • a pair of second continuous portions 363j of an FPC 363B, which will be described later, is disposed in each of the recesses 322j.
  • the structure of the recessed part 322j is not limited to the case of illustration.
  • the spring placement portions 324a1 to 324d1 have gel placement portions 324e to 324h, respectively.
  • the spring placement portions 324a1 to 324d1 have gel placement portions 324e to 324h at end portions on the Z direction + side, respectively.
  • Each of the gel placement portions 324e to 324h is configured to be able to hold gel-like vibration control members 325a to 325d that cover portions of the springs 362a1 to 362d1.
  • the lens unit 33 is disposed in the second accommodation space 320 while being held by a lens guide 361B described later.
  • a lens part 33 has a cylindrical lens barrel and one or more lenses held in the lens barrel.
  • the lens unit 33 includes a telephoto lens group having, for example, an optical triplex or more, which is fixed between the X-direction end of the lens barrel and the X-direction end of the lens barrel.
  • the structure of the lens part 33 is not limited to the above-mentioned structure.
  • the AF device 36A (see FIGS. 48 and 49) displaces the lens unit 33 in the X direction for the purpose of autofocus.
  • the AF device 36A includes a lens guide 361B, a plurality (four in this embodiment) of springs 362a1 to 362d1, an FPC 363B, and a pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1.
  • the lens guide 361B (see FIGS. 46 to 48) has a housing space capable of holding the lens barrel. Such a lens guide 361B is arranged in the above-described second accommodation space 320 in a state where displacement in the X direction (that is, the direction of the second optical axis) and the Y direction is possible.
  • the lens guide 361B has a pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) for holding AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 of a pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1 described later.
  • the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 are respectively disposed in the magnet spaces 322g and 322h (see FIG. 11) of the second base 32A.
  • 48 is a side view of the lens module 3a with some members omitted, as viewed from the Y direction + side.
  • FIG. 49 is a side view of the lens module 3a with some members omitted, as viewed from the Y direction-side.
  • each of the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 is a recess that is open on the Z direction minus side in a plan view from the Y direction.
  • the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 has inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 facing the chamfered portions 365c1 and 365c2 of the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1, respectively, in a state where the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 are held.
  • the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 have a pair of side surface portions 361c1 and 361c2 that are separated in the X direction and face each other in the X direction.
  • Each of the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 has an upper surface portion 361d in which the end portions on the Z direction + side of the pair of side surface portions 361c1 and 361c2 are continuous in the X direction.
  • the pair of side surface portions 361c1 and 361c2 have the inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 described above at the end in the Z direction-side.
  • the inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 are inclined surfaces along the chamfered portions 365c1 and 365c2 of the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1.
  • the inclined surface portion 361e1 and the inclined surface portion 361e2 are inclined in the direction in which the mutual distance in the X direction becomes shorter toward the Z direction-side (lower side in FIGS. 48 and 49). That is, the distance in the X direction between the inclined surface portion 361e1 and the inclined surface portion 361e2 is the smallest at the end on the negative side in the Z direction.
  • Such inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 contribute to preventing the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 from coming off in the Z direction ⁇ side in the assembled state.
  • the lens guide 361B has a pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1, 368b1 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) for holding second magnets 371a1, 371b1 of a pair of second actuators 370a1, 370b1, which will be described later.
  • the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1, 368b1 respectively overlap with the coil placement portions 322d, 322e of the second base 32A (see FIGS. 46 and 47) at a predetermined interval in the Z direction. .
  • each of the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1 and 368b1 is a recess that is open on the Z direction minus side in a plan view from the Y direction.
  • the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1 and 368b1 respectively have inclined surface portions 368f1 and 368f2 facing the chamfered portions 371e1 and 371e2 of the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 in a state where the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 are held.
  • the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1 and 368b1 have a pair of side surface portions 368d1 and 368d2 that are separated in the X direction and face each other in the X direction.
  • Each of the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1, 368b1 has an upper surface portion 368e in which ends on the Z direction + side of the pair of side surface portions 368d1, 368d2 are continuous in the X direction.
  • the pair of side surface portions 368d1, 368d2 have the above-described inclined surface portions 368f1, 368f2 at the ends in the Z direction-side, respectively.
  • the inclined surface portions 368f1 and 368f2 are inclined surfaces along the chamfered portions 371e1 and 371e2 of the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1.
  • the inclined surface portion 368f1 and the inclined surface portion 368f2 are inclined in a direction in which the mutual distance in the X direction becomes shorter toward the Z direction-side. That is, the distance in the X direction between the inclined surface portion 368f1 and the inclined surface portion 368f2 is the smallest at the end portion on the negative side in the Z direction.
  • Such inclined surface portions 368f1 and 368f2 contribute to preventing the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 from coming off in the Z direction-side in the assembled state.
  • [spring] A plurality of (four in this embodiment) springs 362a1 to 362d1 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) elastically support the lens guide 361B on the second base 32A. In this state, the lens unit 33 can be displaced in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the second base 32A.
  • the spring 362a1 supports the end of the lens guide 361B on the X direction + side and the Y direction + side on the second base 32A (see FIG. 46).
  • the spring 362b1 supports the end of the lens guide 361B on the X direction + side and the Y direction ⁇ side on the second base 32A (see FIG. 47).
  • the spring 362c1 supports the end of the lens guide 361B on the X direction ⁇ side and the Y direction + side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 46).
  • the spring 362d1 supports the end of the lens guide 361B on the X direction-side and the Y direction-side on the second base 32A (see FIG. 47).
  • Each of the springs 362a1 to 362d1 has a first fixing portion 362f1, a second fixing portion 362g1, and an elastic deformation portion 362h1 (see FIG. 51). Note that FIG. 51 shows the springs 362a1 to 362d1 in the assembled state.
  • the first fixed portion 362f1 is fixed to the lens guide 361B which is a movable side member.
  • the second fixing portion 362g1 is fixed to the second base 32A that is a fixing side member.
  • the elastic deformation portion 362h1 continues the first fixing portion 362f1 and the second fixing portion 362g1.
  • the elastic deformation portion 362h1 is made of, for example, a linear member that is bent at least partially in a meandering shape.
  • Each of the elastically deforming portions 362h1 of the springs 362a1 to 362d1 has a gel locking portion 362i1 at the intermediate portion.
  • the gel locking portion 362i1 is covered with the vibration control members 325a, 325b, 325c, and 325d (see FIGS. 46 and 47).
  • Such a gel locking part 362i1 contributes to the improvement of adhesiveness with the vibration control members 325a, 325b, 325c, and 325d by engaging with the vibration control members 325a, 325b, 325c, and 325d.
  • the gel locking portion 362i1 is configured by a curved portion that is curved so as to protrude in the X direction from the straight portion of the elastic deformation portion 362h1.
  • the gel locking portion 362i1 in the springs 362a1 and 362b1 protrudes in the X direction ⁇ side from the straight portion of the elastic deformation portion 362h1.
  • the gel locking part 362i1 in the springs 362c1 and 362d1 protrudes from the straight part of the elastic deformation part 362h1 in the X direction + side.
  • the gel locking part 362i1 in the springs 362a1 and 362b1 and the gel locking part 362i1 in the springs 362c1 and 362d1 protrude from the linear part of the elastic deformation part 362h1 in the opposite direction in the X direction.
  • the shape of the gel locking part 362i1 is not limited to the case of this embodiment.
  • a gel locking part 362i2 shown in FIG. 52B is a modification of the gel locking part 362i1.
  • the gel locking part 362i2 has a continuous part 362j and an annular part 362k.
  • the continuous portion 362j extends linearly in the X direction from the straight portion of the elastic deformation portion 362h1.
  • the annular portion 362k is annular and continues to the tip of the continuous portion 362j.
  • the continuous part 362j may not be linear.
  • the continuous portion 362j in the springs 362a1 and 362b1 extends from the straight portion of the elastic deformation portion 362h1 to the X direction-side.
  • the continuous part 362j in the springs 362c1 and 362d1 extends from the straight part of the elastic deformation part 362h1 to the X direction + side.
  • the continuous part 362j may have a meandering shape.
  • the shape of the annular portion 362k is not limited to the illustrated case.
  • the shape of the annular portion 362k may be a circle, an ellipse, or a polygon.
  • the gel locking portion 362i2 may be omitted.
  • the springs 362a1 to 362d1 are arranged in the spring arrangement portions 324a1 to 324d1 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) of the second base 32A, respectively.
  • the gel locking portions 362i1 of the springs 362a1 to 362d1 are arranged in the gel arrangement portions 324e to 324h in the spring arrangement portions 324a1 to 324d1, respectively.
  • the gel locking portions 362i1 of the springs 362a1 to 362d1 are covered with gel-like vibration control members 325a to 325d arranged in the gel arrangement portions 324e to 324h, respectively.
  • the elastic deformation portion 362h has directionality in the X direction.
  • the spring 362a1 and the spring 362b1 are arranged in the same direction in the X direction. In other words, the spring 362a1 and the spring 362b1 are arranged so that at least the elastic deformation portion 362h1 overlaps in a plan view from the Y direction.
  • the spring 362c1 and the spring 362d1 are arranged to be in the same direction in the X direction. In other words, the spring 362c1 and the spring 362d1 are arranged such that at least the elastic deformation portion 362h1 overlaps in a plan view from the Y direction.
  • the spring 362a1 and the spring 362c1 are arranged so that only the gel locking part 362i2 of the elastically deforming part 362h1 faces in the opposite direction in the X direction.
  • the spring 362a1 and the spring 362c1 are arranged such that portions other than the gel locking portion 362i2 of the elastic deformation portion 362h1 face the same direction in the X direction.
  • the spring 362b1 and the spring 362d1 are arranged so that only the gel locking part 362i2 of the elastically deforming part 362h1 faces in the opposite direction in the X direction. That is, the spring 362b1 and the spring 362d1 are arranged such that the portions other than the gel locking portion 362i2 of the elastically deforming portion 362h1 face the same direction in the X direction.
  • the FPC 363B (see FIG. 50) is a flexible printed circuit board, and is fixed to the second base 32A (see FIGS. 46 and 47).
  • the FPC 363B supplies power to second actuators 370a1 and 370b1 of an AF device 36A and a second shake correction device 37A described later.
  • the FPC 363B is a single continuous flexible printed circuit board, and includes an FPC base portion 363h, a pair of first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b, and a pair of second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e. .
  • the FPC base portion 363h is a plate-like member extending in the Y direction, and is fixed to the bottom surface portion 321 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) of the second base 32A.
  • An AF coil 366a (see FIG. 48) of the AF device 36A is fixed to the first coil fixing portion 363a via the substrate 7a. In this state, the first coil fixing portion 363a and the AF coil 366a are disposed in the bottom surface through hole 321a (see FIG. 15) of the second base 32A.
  • the AF coil 366b (see FIG. 49) of the AF device 36A is fixed to the first coil fixing portion 363b via the substrate 7b.
  • the first coil fixing portion 363b and the AF coil 366b are disposed in the bottom surface through hole 321b of the second base 32A.
  • the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e respectively overlap the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b with a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • Second coils 372a and 372b of a second shake correction device 37A described later are fixed to the surfaces of the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e, respectively (see FIGS. 48 and 49).
  • the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e are placed on the surfaces of the coil placing portion 322d and the coil placing portion 322e (see FIG. 11) of the second base 32A, respectively.
  • the second coil fixing portion 363d continues to the FPC base portion 363h through the first continuous portion 363i.
  • the first continuous portion 363i is a plate-like member that is parallel to the ZY plane.
  • the first continuous portion 363i is disposed in a slit 322i (see FIG. 46) formed on the side surface on the Y direction + side of the second side wall portion 322a1 in the second base 32A.
  • the second coil fixing portion 363e continues to the FPC base portion 363h via the second continuous portion 363j.
  • the second continuous portion 363j is a plate-like member that is parallel to the XZ plane.
  • the second continuous portion 363j is disposed in the concave portion 322j (see FIG. 47) of the second side wall portion 322b1 in the second base 32A.
  • the pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1 are third actuators for autofocus.
  • the AF actuator 364a1 on the Y direction + side includes an AF magnet 365a1 and an AF coil 366a.
  • the Y-direction-side AF actuator 364b1 includes an AF magnet 365b1, an AF coil 366b, and an AF Hall element 367.
  • the pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1 will be described with a focus on the structure of the portion different from the first embodiment.
  • Each of the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 has a hexagonal column shape that is long in the X direction and has a substantially hexagonal shape in a plan view from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 48 and 49).
  • AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 each have a pair of chamfered portions 365c1 and 365c2.
  • the pair of chamfered portions 365c1 and 365c2 are provided on a pair of side surfaces facing in the X direction in the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1, respectively.
  • the chamfered portion 365c1 and the chamfered portion 365c2 overlap in plan view from the X direction.
  • the chamfered portion 365c1 and the chamfered portion 365c2 are inclined in a direction in which the distance between the chamfered portion 365c1 and the chamfered portion 365c2 approaches each other in the X direction toward the Z direction minus side in plan view from the Y direction.
  • Such chamfered portion 365c1 and chamfered portion 365c2 respectively face the inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 of the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 in the lens guide 361B in the assembled state.
  • Other structures of the pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1 are the same as those of the pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b of the first embodiment.
  • the second shake correction device 37A (see FIGS. 48 and 49) performs shake correction in the Y direction by displacing the lens unit 33 in the Y direction. Such a second shake correction device 37A is disposed in the second accommodation space 320 (see FIG. 4).
  • the second shake correction device 37A includes the lens guide 361B described above, the plurality of springs 362a1 to 362d1 described above, the FPC 363B described above, and a pair of second actuators 370a1 and 370b1.
  • the lens guide 361B, the springs 362a1 to 362d1, and the FPC 363B are common to the AF device 36A.
  • the second actuator 370a1 (see FIG. 48) on the Y direction + side is arranged in a state where it overlaps the above-described AF actuator 364a1 with a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
  • Such a second actuator 370a1 has a second magnet 371a1 and a second coil 372a.
  • the second coil 372a is the same as that in the first embodiment.
  • the second actuator 370b1 (see FIG. 49) on the Y-direction side is arranged in a state of being overlapped with the above-described AF actuator 364b1 at a predetermined interval in the Z-direction.
  • Such a second actuator 370a1 includes a second magnet 371b1, a second coil 372b, and a second Hall element 373.
  • the second coil 372b and the second Hall element 373 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the pair of second actuators 370a1 and 370b1 will be described focusing on the structure of the portion different from the first embodiment.
  • the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 of the pair of second actuators 370a1 and 370b1 are respectively held by the second magnet holding portions 368a1 and 368b1 of the lens guide 361B.
  • the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 each have a hexagonal column shape that is long in the X direction and has a substantially hexagonal shape in a plan view from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 48 and 49).
  • the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 have a pair of chamfered portions 371e1 and 371e2, respectively.
  • the pair of chamfered portions 371e1 and 371e2 are provided on the pair of side surfaces facing the X direction in the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1, respectively.
  • the chamfered portion 371e1 and the chamfered portion 371e2 overlap in plan view from the X direction.
  • the chamfered portion 371e1 and the chamfered portion 371e2 are inclined in a direction in which the mutual distance in the X direction becomes closer toward the Z direction minus side in a plan view from the Y direction.
  • Such chamfered portion 371e1 and chamfered portion 371e2 respectively face the inclined surface portions 368f1, 368f2 of the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1, 368b1 in the lens guide 361B in the assembled state.
  • the other parts of the structure of the pair of second actuators 370a1 and 370b1 are the same as those of the pair of second actuators 370a and 370b in the first embodiment. Further, in the camera module according to the present embodiment, the configuration, operation, and effects other than those described above are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the camera actuator and camera module according to the present invention can be mounted on a thin camera mounting device such as a smartphone, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, or an in-vehicle camera.
  • a thin camera mounting device such as a smartphone, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, or an in-vehicle camera.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Adjustment Of Camera Lenses (AREA)
  • Studio Devices (AREA)
  • Reciprocating, Oscillating Or Vibrating Motors (AREA)
  • Lens Barrels (AREA)
  • Camera Bodies And Camera Details Or Accessories (AREA)
  • Structure And Mechanism Of Cameras (AREA)

Abstract

This camera actuator comprises: an optical path bending member; a lens unit disposed at a subsequent stage of the optical path bending member; a first actuator that is disposed near the optical path bending member and displaces the optical path bending member; and a second actuator and a third actuator that are disposed near the lens unit so as to be apart from each other in a first direction, and that respectively displace the lens unit in a second direction and a third direction that are orthogonal to the first direction and orthogonal to each other. As a result, the present invention provides a camera actuator capable of improving the degree of freedom of design around the optical path bending member.

Description

カメラ用アクチュエータ、カメラモジュール、およびカメラ搭載装置Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device
 本発明は、カメラ用アクチュエータ、カメラモジュール、およびカメラ搭載装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device.
 従来、スマートフォンやデジタルカメラなど、カメラモジュールを搭載した薄型のカメラ搭載装置が知られている。カメラモジュールは、1以上のレンズを有するレンズ部と、レンズ部により結像された被写体像を撮像する撮像素子とを備える。 Conventionally, thin camera-equipped devices equipped with camera modules such as smartphones and digital cameras are known. The camera module includes a lens unit having one or more lenses and an image sensor that captures a subject image formed by the lens unit.
 また、レンズ部の前段に設けられた光路屈曲部材であるプリズムにより、第一光軸に沿う被写体からの光を第二光軸の方向に屈曲して後段のレンズ部に導光する屈曲光学系を備えるカメラモジュールも提案されている(例えば、特許文献1)。 Also, a bending optical system in which light from a subject along the first optical axis is bent in the direction of the second optical axis and guided to the subsequent lens unit by a prism that is an optical path bending member provided in the front stage of the lens unit There has also been proposed a camera module including the above (for example, Patent Document 1).
 特許文献1に開示されたカメラモジュールは、カメラに生じる手振れを補正する振れ補正装置、および、オートフォーカスを行うオートフォーカス装置を備えている。このようなカメラモジュールは、カメラ用アクチュエータとして振れ補正用アクチュエータおよびオートフォーカス用アクチュエータを有する。このうちの振れ補正用アクチュエータは、異なる二軸を中心にプリズムを揺動させる第一アクチュエータおよび第二アクチュエータを備えている。カメラに手振れが生じると、制御部の制御下で振れ補正用アクチュエータがプリズムを揺動させる。これによりカメラに生じた手振れが補正される。 The camera module disclosed in Patent Document 1 includes a shake correction device that corrects camera shake generated in the camera, and an autofocus device that performs autofocus. Such a camera module has a shake correction actuator and an autofocus actuator as camera actuators. Of these, the shake correction actuator includes a first actuator and a second actuator that swing the prism about two different axes. When camera shake occurs, the shake correction actuator swings the prism under the control of the control unit. As a result, camera shake generated in the camera is corrected.
特開2015-92285号公報JP2015-92285A
 ところで、上述のような特許文献1に開示されたカメラ用アクチュエータの場合、振れ補正用アクチュエータの第一アクチュエータおよび第二アクチュエータが、プリズムの周囲に配置されているため、当該プリズムの周囲における設計の自由度が低くなってしまう可能性がある。 By the way, in the case of the camera actuator disclosed in Patent Document 1 as described above, since the first actuator and the second actuator of the shake correction actuator are arranged around the prism, the design around the prism is designed. There is a possibility that the degree of freedom becomes low.
 本発明の目的は、光路屈曲部材の周囲における設計の自由度を向上できるカメラ用アクチュエータ、カメラモジュール、およびカメラ搭載装置を提供することである。 An object of the present invention is to provide a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device that can improve the degree of design freedom around the optical path bending member.
 本発明に係るカメラ用アクチュエータの一態様は、光路屈曲部材と、上記光路屈曲部材の後段に配置されたレンズ部と、上記光路屈曲部材の近傍に配置され、上記光路屈曲部材を変位させる第一アクチュエータと、上記レンズ部の近傍で第一方向において互いに離間して配置され、上記レンズ部を、上記第一方向に直交しかつ互いに直交する第二方向および第三方向のそれぞれにおいて変位させる第二アクチュエータおよび第三アクチュエータと、を備える。 One aspect of the camera actuator according to the present invention is an optical path bending member, a lens portion disposed at a subsequent stage of the optical path bending member, and a first unit disposed near the optical path bending member to displace the optical path bending member. A second actuator is disposed in the vicinity of the lens portion in the first direction so as to be spaced apart from each other, and the lens portion is displaced in each of the second direction and the third direction orthogonal to the first direction and orthogonal to each other. An actuator and a third actuator.
 本発明に係るカメラモジュールの一態様は、上述のカメラ用アクチュエータと、レンズ部の後段に配置された撮像素子と、を備える。 One aspect of the camera module according to the present invention includes the above-described camera actuator and an image sensor disposed at the rear stage of the lens unit.
 本発明に係るカメラ搭載装置の一態様は、上述のカメラモジュールと、当該カメラモジュールを制御する制御部と、を有する。 One aspect of the camera mounting device according to the present invention includes the above-described camera module and a control unit that controls the camera module.
 本発明によれば、光路屈曲部材の周囲における設計の自由度を向上できるカメラ用アクチュエータ、カメラモジュール、およびカメラ搭載装置を提供できる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a camera actuator, a camera module, and a camera mounting device that can improve the degree of design freedom around the optical path bending member.
実施形態1に係るカメラモジュールの斜視図である。1 is a perspective view of a camera module according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 図1Aと別の角度から見たカメラモジュールの斜視図である。FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the camera module viewed from a different angle from FIG. 1A. ケースを省略した状態のカメラモジュールの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a camera module in a state where a case is omitted. ケースを省略した状態で図2と別の角度から見たカメラモジュールの斜視図である。It is the perspective view of the camera module seen from the angle different from FIG. 2 in the state which abbreviate | omitted the case. 図1AのA-A断面図である。It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 1A. 図1AのB-B断面図である。It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. 1A. 図1AのC-C断面図である。It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 1A. 第一ベースの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the 1st base. 第一ベースにホルダを組み付けた状態の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the state where the holder was assembled to the first base. 図9Aは、第一カバーを省略した状態のプリズムモジュールの斜視図であって、図9Bは、抑えバネの押圧部がホルダの被押圧部を押圧した状態を説明するための図9AのE-E断面に相当する断面図である。9A is a perspective view of the prism module in a state where the first cover is omitted, and FIG. 9B is an E-section of FIG. 9A for explaining a state in which the pressing portion of the holding spring presses the pressed portion of the holder. It is sectional drawing equivalent to E cross section. 抑えバネのみを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows only a restraining spring. レンズモジュールを図1AのD-D線で切断した場合の断面図である。FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the lens module when cut along the line DD in FIG. 1A. 第二カバーを省略した状態のレンズモジュールの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a lens module in the state where the second cover was omitted. 図12と別の角度から見た第二カバーを省略した状態のレンズモジュールの斜視図である。FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the lens module in a state in which a second cover is omitted from a different angle from FIG. 12. 第二ベースの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the 2nd base. 図14と別の角度から見た第二ベースの斜視図である。It is the perspective view of the 2nd base seen from the angle different from FIG. レンズガイドの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a lens guide. スプリングを組付状態の配置のまま取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows a spring with the arrangement | positioning of an assembly | attachment state. レンズモジュールのFPCのみを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows only FPC of a lens module. 基準部材のみを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows only a reference member. 実施形態2に係るカメラモジュールの斜視図である。6 is a perspective view of a camera module according to Embodiment 2. FIG. カメラモジュールのプリズムモジュール部分の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the prism module part of a camera module. カメラモジュールを搭載したカメラ搭載装置の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the camera mounting apparatus which mounts a camera module. 実施形態3に係るカメラモジュールのプリズムモジュールを図1AのC-C線で切断した場合の断面図である。FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the prism module of the camera module according to Embodiment 3 taken along line CC in FIG. 1A. 図23のE部拡大図である。It is the E section enlarged view of FIG. プリズムモジュールを図1AのA-A線で切断した場合の断面図である。1B is a cross-sectional view of the prism module taken along line AA in FIG. 1A. FIG. 第一ベースに一部の部材を組み付けた状態の斜視図である。It is a perspective view in the state where some members were assembled to the first base. 図26に示す状態の第一ベースに揺動支持バネを組み付けた状態の斜視図である。FIG. 27 is a perspective view of a state in which a swing support spring is assembled to the first base in the state shown in FIG. 26. 第一カバーおよびプリズムを省略した状態のプリズムモジュールの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a prism module in a state where a first cover and a prism are omitted. 第一カバーを省略した状態のプリズムモジュールの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a prism module in a state where a first cover is omitted. 揺動支持バネを組付状態の配置のまま取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows a rocking | fluctuation support spring with arrangement | positioning of an assembly | attachment state. 図29の右側から見た部分側面図である。It is the partial side view seen from the right side of FIG. ホルダの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a holder. 実施形態4に係るカメラモジュールの第二アクチュエータおよびAFアクチェエータを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows the 2nd actuator and AF actuator of a camera module concerning Embodiment 4. 実施形態5に係るカメラモジュールのレンズモジュールを一部の部材を省略した状態で示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the lens module of the camera module which concerns on Embodiment 5 in the state which omitted some members. 第二アクチュエータ、AFアクチェエータ、補強プレート、およびFPCを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows a 2nd actuator, AF actuator, a reinforcement plate, and FPC. 第二アクチュエータ、AFアクチェエータ、および補強プレートを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows a 2nd actuator, AF actuator, and a reinforcement plate. 実施形態6に係るカメラモジュールの第二アクチュエータおよびAFアクチェエータを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows the 2nd actuator and AF actuator of a camera module concerning Embodiment 6. 実施形態7に係るカメラモジュールのレンズモジュールを一部の部材を省略した状態で示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the lens module of the camera module which concerns on Embodiment 7 in the state which abbreviate | omitted some members. 第二アクチュエータおよびAFアクチェエータを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows a 2nd actuator and AF actuator. 本発明の実施形態8に係るカメラモジュールのプリズムモジュールを一部の部材を省略した状態で示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the prism module of the camera module which concerns on Embodiment 8 of this invention in the state which abbreviate | omitted some members. 一部の部材を省略したプリズムモジュールを図40と別角度から見た状態で示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the prism module which abbreviate | omitted one part member in the state seen from the angle different from FIG. 第一ベースにホルダを組み付けた状態の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the state where the holder was assembled to the first base. 第一ベースの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the 1st base. 第一ベースの平面図である。It is a top view of the 1st base. 抑えバネのみを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows only a restraining spring. 一部の部材を省略したレンズモジュールの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a lens module which omitted some members. 一部の部材を省略したレンズモジュールを図46と別角度から見た状態で示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the lens module which abbreviate | omitted one part member in the state seen from the angle different from FIG. 第二ベースを省略したレンズモジュールの側面図である。It is a side view of the lens module which abbreviate | omitted the 2nd base. 第二ベースを省略したレンズモジュールを、図48と反対側から見た状態で示す側面図である。It is a side view which shows the lens module which abbreviate | omitted the 2nd base in the state seen from the opposite side to FIG. レンズモジュールのFPCのみを取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows only FPC of a lens module. スプリングを組付状態の配置のまま取り出して示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which takes out and shows a spring with the arrangement | positioning of an assembly | attachment state. 図52Aは、実施形態8に係るスプリングのゲル係止部を示す模式図であって、図52Bは、ゲル係止部の変形例1を示す模式図であって、図52Cは、ゲル係止部の変形例2を示す模式図である。52A is a schematic diagram showing a gel locking part of a spring according to Embodiment 8, and FIG. 52B is a schematic diagram showing Modification 1 of the gel locking part, and FIG. 52C is a gel locking part. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of a part.
 以下、本発明に係る実施形態のいくつかの例を図面に基づいて詳細に説明する。なお、以下の各実施形態同士は、技術的に矛盾しない限り、適宜組み合わせて実施できる。 Hereinafter, some examples of embodiments according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the following embodiments can be combined as appropriate as long as there is no technical contradiction.
 [1.実施形態1]
 図1Aおよび図1Bは、本発明の実施形態1に係るカメラモジュール1の斜視図である。図2、3は、ケースを外した状態のカメラモジュール1の斜視図である。さらに、図4は、図1AのA-A断面図であり、図5は、図1AのB-B断面図である。以下、カメラモジュール1の概要について説明した後、カメラモジュール1が備えるプリズムモジュール2、レンズモジュール3、および撮像素子モジュール4の具体的構造について説明する。
[1. Embodiment 1]
1A and 1B are perspective views of a camera module 1 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 2 and 3 are perspective views of the camera module 1 with the case removed. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 1A. Hereinafter, after describing the outline of the camera module 1, specific structures of the prism module 2, the lens module 3, and the imaging element module 4 included in the camera module 1 will be described.
 [1.1 カメラモジュールについて]
 カメラモジュール1は、例えばスマートフォン(図22参照)、携帯電話機、デジタルカメラ、ノート型パソコン、タブレット端末、携帯型ゲーム機、車載カメラなどの薄型のカメラ搭載装置に搭載される。
[1.1 Camera module]
The camera module 1 is mounted on a thin camera mounting device such as a smartphone (see FIG. 22), a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, an in-vehicle camera, and the like.
 以下、本実施形態のカメラモジュール1を構成する各部については、カメラモジュール1に組み込まれた状態を基準として説明する。また、本実施形態のカメラモジュール1の構造を説明するにあたり、直交座標系(X,Y,Z)を使用する。後述する図においても共通の直交座標系(X,Y,Z)で示している。 Hereinafter, each part constituting the camera module 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to a state in which the camera module 1 is incorporated. In describing the structure of the camera module 1 of the present embodiment, an orthogonal coordinate system (X, Y, Z) is used. In the drawings to be described later, a common orthogonal coordinate system (X, Y, Z) is also used.
 カメラモジュール1は、カメラ搭載装置で実際に撮影が行われる場合に、例えばX方向が左右方向、Y方向が上下方向、Z方向が前後方向となるように搭載される。被写体からの光は、図4に破線α(第一光軸ともいう。)で示すように、Z方向+側(プラス側)からプリズムモジュール2のプリズム23に入射する。プリズム23に入射した光は、図4に破線β(第二光軸ともいう。)で示すように、プリズム23の光路屈曲面231で屈曲して、プリズム23よりも後段(つまり、X方向+側)に配置されたレンズモジュール3のレンズ部33へと導光される。そして、レンズ部33(図4参照)により結像された被写体像が、レンズモジュール3の後段に配置された撮像素子モジュール4により撮像される。 The camera module 1 is mounted so that the X direction is the left-right direction, the Y direction is the up-down direction, and the Z direction is the front-rear direction, for example, when shooting is actually performed by the camera mounting device. The light from the subject enters the prism 23 of the prism module 2 from the Z direction + side (plus side) as indicated by a broken line α (also referred to as a first optical axis) in FIG. The light incident on the prism 23 is bent at the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 as shown by a broken line β (also referred to as a second optical axis) in FIG. The light is guided to the lens portion 33 of the lens module 3 arranged on the side). Then, the subject image formed by the lens unit 33 (see FIG. 4) is imaged by the imaging element module 4 disposed at the subsequent stage of the lens module 3.
 上述のカメラモジュール1は、プリズムモジュール2に組み込まれた第一振れ補正装置24(図4参照)、および、レンズモジュール3に組み込まれた第二振れ補正装置37(図5参照)により、振れ補正(OIS:Optical Image Stabilization)を行う。また、上述のカメラモジュール1は、レンズモジュール3に組み込まれたAF装置36によりレンズ部33をX方向に変位させて、オートフォーカスを行う。 The camera module 1 described above is shake-corrected by the first shake correction device 24 (see FIG. 4) incorporated in the prism module 2 and the second shake correction device 37 (see FIG. 5) incorporated in the lens module 3. (OIS: Optical Image Stabilization). Further, the camera module 1 described above performs autofocus by displacing the lens unit 33 in the X direction by the AF device 36 incorporated in the lens module 3.
 [1.1.1 カメラ用アクチュエータについて]
 上述のカメラモジュール1は、第一振れ補正装置24、第二振れ補正装置37、およびAF装置36を駆動するカメラ用アクチュエータを有する。このようなカメラ用アクチュエータは、第一振れ補正装置24を駆動する第一アクチュエータ244、第二振れ補正装置37を駆動する一対の第二アクチュエータ370a、370b、およびAF装置36を駆動する一対のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bを有する。
[1.1.1 Camera actuator]
The camera module 1 described above has a camera actuator that drives the first shake correction device 24, the second shake correction device 37, and the AF device 36. Such a camera actuator includes a first actuator 244 that drives the first shake correction device 24, a pair of second actuators 370a and 370b that drives the second shake correction device 37, and a pair of AF that drives the AF device 36. Actuators 364a and 364b are provided.
 本実施形態の場合、光路屈曲部材であるプリズム23の周囲における設計の自由度を向上すべく、第一アクチュエータ244の配置態様を工夫するとともに、レンズモジュール3における第二アクチュエータ370a、370bおよびAFアクチュエータ364a、364bの配置態様を工夫している。各アクチュエータの配置態様は、後述するプリズムモジュール2およびレンズモジュール3の説明により明らかとなる。 In the case of the present embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuator 244 is devised to improve the degree of freedom of design around the prism 23 that is an optical path bending member, and the second actuators 370a and 370b and the AF actuator in the lens module 3 are devised. The arrangement mode of 364a and 364b is devised. The arrangement mode of each actuator will become clear from the description of the prism module 2 and the lens module 3 described later.
 以下、図1A~19を参照して、本実施形態のカメラモジュール1が備える、プリズムモジュール2、レンズモジュール3、および撮像素子モジュール4について説明する。 Hereinafter, the prism module 2, the lens module 3, and the image sensor module 4 included in the camera module 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A to 19.
 [1.1.2 プリズムモジュールについて]
 プリズムモジュール2は、図4に示すように、第一カバー21、第一ベース22、プリズム23、および第一振れ補正装置24を備える。
[1.1.2 Prism module]
As shown in FIG. 4, the prism module 2 includes a first cover 21, a first base 22, a prism 23, and a first shake correction device 24.
 [第一カバー]
 第一カバー21は、図4、5に示すように、例えば合成樹脂製または非磁性金属製であり、Z方向両側およびX方向+側が開口した箱状部材である。被写体側からの光は、第一カバー21のZ方向+側の開口部を通過して第一カバー21の内部空間に侵入可能である。以上のような第一カバー21は、後述する第一ベース22にZ方向+側から組み合わされている。
[First cover]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the first cover 21 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin or a nonmagnetic metal, and is a box-shaped member that is open on both sides in the Z direction and on the X direction + side. Light from the subject side can enter the internal space of the first cover 21 through the opening in the Z direction + side of the first cover 21. The first cover 21 as described above is combined with the first base 22 described later from the Z direction + side.
 [第一ベース]
 第一ベース22は、後述する第一振れ補正装置24のホルダ241(図4、8参照)を、Y方向に平行な第一軸を中心とした揺動を可能に支持する。このために、第一ベース22は、軸受部である第一軸受部225aおよび第二軸受部225b(図7参照)を有する。
[First base]
The first base 22 supports a holder 241 (see FIGS. 4 and 8) of a first shake correction device 24, which will be described later, so as to be able to swing around a first axis parallel to the Y direction. For this purpose, the first base 22 has a first bearing portion 225a and a second bearing portion 225b (see FIG. 7) which are bearing portions.
 本実施形態の場合、第一ベース22は、Z方向+側およびX方向+側がそれぞれ開口した箱状部材である。なお、第一ベース22のZ方向-側の壁部(つまり、底壁部229)には、ベース第一開口部220(図4参照)が形成されている。図7では、ベース第一開口部220に後述する第一アクチュエータ244の第一コイル244cおよび第一ホール素子244eなどが配置されている。このような第一ベース22は、上述の第一カバー21と組み合わされることにより、第一振れ補正装置24およびプリズム23を配置可能な第一収容空間223(図4参照)を形成する。 In the case of the present embodiment, the first base 22 is a box-shaped member that is open on the Z direction + side and the X direction + side. Note that a base first opening 220 (see FIG. 4) is formed in a wall portion on the Z direction − side of the first base 22 (that is, the bottom wall portion 229). In FIG. 7, a first coil 244 c and a first Hall element 244 e of the first actuator 244 described later are disposed in the base first opening 220. The first base 22 is combined with the first cover 21 to form a first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 4) in which the first shake correction device 24 and the prism 23 can be arranged.
 また、第一ベース22は、Y方向両端部にY方向に対向した第一側壁部224a、224b(図7参照)を有する。Y方向+側の第一側壁部224aには、第一軸受部225aが設けられている。一方、Y方向-側の第一側壁部224bには、第二軸受部225bが設けられている。 Further, the first base 22 has first side wall portions 224a and 224b (see FIG. 7) opposed to the Y direction at both ends in the Y direction. A first bearing portion 225a is provided on the first side wall portion 224a on the Y direction + side. On the other hand, a second bearing portion 225b is provided on the first side wall portion 224b on the Y direction minus side.
 第一軸受部225aと第二軸受部225bとは、互いにY方向に対称な形状を有する。以下、第一軸受部225aの構造について説明する。第一軸受部225aは、Y方向視でZ方向+側が開口した略V字の切り欠き状である。このような第一軸受部225aのX方向両側面は、曲面状である。 The first bearing portion 225a and the second bearing portion 225b have shapes symmetrical to each other in the Y direction. Hereinafter, the structure of the first bearing portion 225a will be described. The first bearing portion 225a has a substantially V-shaped notch shape that opens in the Z direction + side when viewed in the Y direction. Both side surfaces in the X direction of the first bearing portion 225a are curved.
 また、第一側壁部224a、224bのZ方向+側の端面にはそれぞれ、第一位置決め凸部226、第二位置決め凸部227、および第三位置決め凸部228(図7参照)が形成されている。第一位置決め凸部226および第二位置決め凸部227は、後述する一対の抑えバネ242(図10参照)と係合して、一対の抑えバネ242のY方向のずれを防止する。一方、第三位置決め凸部228は、一対の抑えバネ242と係合することにより、一対の抑えバネ242の組み付け時の位置決めを図る。 In addition, a first positioning convex portion 226, a second positioning convex portion 227, and a third positioning convex portion 228 (see FIG. 7) are formed on the end surfaces on the Z direction + side of the first side wall portions 224a and 224b, respectively. Yes. The first positioning convex portion 226 and the second positioning convex portion 227 engage with a pair of holding springs 242 (see FIG. 10) described later, and prevent the pair of holding springs 242 from shifting in the Y direction. On the other hand, the third positioning protrusion 228 engages with the pair of holding springs 242 to position the pair of holding springs 242 when assembled.
 なお、軸受部の構造は図示の場合に限定されない。軸受部は、例えば、転がり軸受、滑り軸受などの軸受であってもよい。 Note that the structure of the bearing is not limited to the illustrated case. The bearing portion may be a bearing such as a rolling bearing or a sliding bearing, for example.
 [プリズム]
 プリズム23は、三角柱状であって、後述する第一振れ補正装置24のホルダ241(図4、8参照)に保持された状態で第一収容空間223に配置されている。
[prism]
The prism 23 has a triangular prism shape, and is disposed in the first accommodation space 223 while being held by a holder 241 (see FIGS. 4 and 8) of the first shake correction device 24 described later.
 このようなプリズム23は、被写体側(つまり、Z方向+側)からの入射光を光路屈曲面231(図4参照)で屈曲させて後述するレンズ部33の方向(つまり、X方向+側)に導光する。 Such a prism 23 bends incident light from the subject side (that is, the Z direction + side) at the optical path bending surface 231 (see FIG. 4), and the direction of the lens unit 33 described later (that is, the X direction + side). To guide the light.
 光路屈曲面231は、Y方向に平行な面であり、上述のような導光が可能となるように第一光軸(つまり、Z方向)に対して所定角度(本実施形態では45°)だけ傾斜している。なお、プリズム23の構造は、被写体側からの入射光をレンズ部33に導光できれば、本実施形態と異なってもよい。 The optical path bending surface 231 is a surface parallel to the Y direction, and a predetermined angle (45 ° in the present embodiment) with respect to the first optical axis (that is, the Z direction) so that the above-described light guide is possible. Just tilted. The structure of the prism 23 may be different from that of the present embodiment as long as incident light from the subject side can be guided to the lens unit 33.
 [第一振れ補正装置]
 第一振れ補正装置24は、Y方向に平行な第一軸を中心にプリズム23を揺動させて、当該第一軸を中心とした回転方向の振れ補正を行う。このような第一振れ補正装置24は、第一収容空間223(図4参照)に配置されている。
[First shake correction device]
The first shake correction device 24 swings the prism 23 around a first axis parallel to the Y direction, and performs shake correction in the rotational direction around the first axis. Such a first shake correction device 24 is arranged in the first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 4).
 第一振れ補正装置24(図2、4参照)は、ホルダ241、一対の抑えバネ242、および第一アクチュエータ244を備える。 The first shake correction device 24 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) includes a holder 241, a pair of holding springs 242, and a first actuator 244.
 このような第一振れ補正装置24において、ホルダ241は、第一ベース22に揺動可能に支持されている。この状態でホルダ241は、第一アクチュエータ244の駆動力に基づいて第一軸を中心に揺動できる。制御部(図示省略)の制御下で第一アクチュエータ244が駆動されると、ホルダ241およびプリズム23が第一軸を中心に揺動する。これにより、当該第一軸を中心とした回転方向の振れが補正される。以下、ホルダ241、抑えバネ242、および第一アクチュエータ244の具体的構造について説明する。 In such a first shake correction device 24, the holder 241 is supported by the first base 22 so as to be swingable. In this state, the holder 241 can swing around the first axis based on the driving force of the first actuator 244. When the first actuator 244 is driven under the control of a control unit (not shown), the holder 241 and the prism 23 swing around the first axis. Thereby, the shake in the rotational direction around the first axis is corrected. Hereinafter, specific structures of the holder 241, the holding spring 242, and the first actuator 244 will be described.
 [ホルダ]
 ホルダ241(図6、8参照)は、例えば、合成樹脂製であって、第一ベース22に対してプリズム23を揺動可能な状態で保持する。
[holder]
The holder 241 (see FIGS. 6 and 8) is made of, for example, a synthetic resin and holds the prism 23 in a swingable manner with respect to the first base 22.
 ホルダ241は、プリズム23の光路屈曲面231に裏側(Z方向-側)から対面する載置面241a(図6、8参照)を有する。載置面241aは、例えば、光路屈曲面231と平行な面を有する。なお、載置面241aは、本実施形態の構造に限定されず、例えば、プリズム23の位置決めを可能な形状を有するボスなどでもよい。 The holder 241 has a mounting surface 241a (see FIGS. 6 and 8) that faces the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 from the back side (Z direction-side). The mounting surface 241a has, for example, a surface parallel to the optical path bending surface 231. The mounting surface 241a is not limited to the structure of the present embodiment, and may be a boss having a shape that enables positioning of the prism 23, for example.
 ホルダ241は、互いに同軸に設けられた一対の揺動支持部241c、241d(図6、8参照)を有する。揺動支持部241c、241dの中心軸が、ホルダ241の揺動中心軸(つまり、第一軸)である。 The holder 241 has a pair of swing support portions 241c and 241d (see FIGS. 6 and 8) provided coaxially with each other. The center axis of the swing support portions 241c and 241d is the swing center axis (that is, the first axis) of the holder 241.
 揺動支持部241c、241dはそれぞれ、載置面241aをY方向両側から挟む一対の対向壁部241f、241g(図6、8参照)に設けられている。具体的には、揺動支持部241cは、対向壁部241fのY方向+側面に設けられている。このような揺動支持部241cは、第一ベース22の第一軸受部225aと係合している。 The swing support portions 241c and 241d are respectively provided on a pair of opposing wall portions 241f and 241g (see FIGS. 6 and 8) that sandwich the mounting surface 241a from both sides in the Y direction. Specifically, the swing support portion 241c is provided on the Y direction + side surface of the opposing wall portion 241f. Such a swinging support portion 241 c is engaged with the first bearing portion 225 a of the first base 22.
 一方、揺動支持部241dは、対向壁部241gのY方向-側面に設けられている。このような揺動支持部241dは、第一ベース22の第二軸受部225bと係合している。 On the other hand, the swing support portion 241d is provided on the Y direction-side surface of the opposing wall portion 241g. Such a swinging support portion 241 d is engaged with the second bearing portion 225 b of the first base 22.
 また、ホルダ241は、被押圧部241i、241k(図2、3、8参照)を有している。このような被押圧部241i、241kはそれぞれ、後述する1対の抑えバネ242によりZ方向-側に(つまり、第一ベース22に向けて)押圧されている。これにより、ホルダ241は、Z方向における位置決めを図られている。 The holder 241 has pressed parts 241i and 241k (see FIGS. 2, 3 and 8). Each of the pressed parts 241i and 241k is pressed in the Z direction-side (that is, toward the first base 22) by a pair of holding springs 242 described later. Thereby, the holder 241 is positioned in the Z direction.
 本実施形態の場合、Y方向+側の被押圧部241i(図2、8参照)は、対向壁部241fのY方向+側面に形成された二個の凸部である。具体的には、被押圧部241iは、対向壁部241fのY方向+側面において揺動支持部241cのX方向両側に設けられている。 In the case of this embodiment, the pressed portion 241i (see FIGS. 2 and 8) on the Y direction + side is two convex portions formed on the Y direction + side surface of the opposing wall portion 241f. Specifically, the pressed portion 241i is provided on both sides in the X direction of the swing support portion 241c on the Y direction + side surface of the opposing wall portion 241f.
 一方、Y方向-側の被押圧部241k(図3参照)は、対向壁部241gのY方向-側面に形成された二個の凸部である。具体的には、被押圧部241kは、対向壁部241gのY方向-側面における揺動支持部241dのX方向両側に設けられている。 On the other hand, the pressed portion 241k (see FIG. 3) on the Y direction-side is two convex portions formed on the Y direction-side surface of the opposing wall portion 241g. Specifically, the pressed portion 241k is provided on both sides in the X direction of the swing support portion 241d on the Y direction-side surface of the opposing wall portion 241g.
 上述のような被押圧部241i、241kはそれぞれ、球面状の外周面を有する。具体的には、被押圧部241i、241kはそれぞれ、ZX平面に平行な面で切断した断面形状が、対向壁部241f、241gから離れるほど直径が小さくなる円形である。このため、被押圧部241i、241kの外周面と一対の抑えバネ242との接触が点接触となる。 Each of the pressed parts 241i and 241k as described above has a spherical outer peripheral surface. Specifically, each of the pressed parts 241i and 241k has a circular shape in which a cross-sectional shape cut along a plane parallel to the ZX plane has a diameter that decreases as the distance from the opposing wall parts 241f and 241g increases. For this reason, the contact between the outer peripheral surfaces of the pressed parts 241i and 241k and the pair of holding springs 242 is a point contact.
 また、被押圧部241i、241kの外周面を球面状にすることにより、一対の抑えバネ242が被押圧部241i、241kを押圧する力に、ホルダ241のY方向における中央向きの成分が含まれる。このような構成により、ホルダ241は、Y方向の位置決め、および、がたつきの低減が図られている。 Further, by making the outer peripheral surfaces of the pressed parts 241i and 241k into a spherical shape, the force of the pair of holding springs 242 pressing the pressed parts 241i and 241k includes a component in the center of the holder 241 in the Y direction. . With such a configuration, the holder 241 is positioned in the Y direction and reduced in backlash.
 さらに、ホルダ241は、後述する第一アクチュエータ244への通電が切れた場合に、一対の抑えバネ242の弾性力に基づいて初期位置に復帰する。なお、ホルダ241の初期位置とは、ホルダ241が第一アクチュエータ244により揺動させられていない状態をいう。 Furthermore, the holder 241 returns to the initial position based on the elastic force of the pair of holding springs 242 when the energization of the first actuator 244 described later is cut off. The initial position of the holder 241 means a state where the holder 241 is not swung by the first actuator 244.
 [抑えバネ]
 一対の抑えバネ242(図9A、図9B、図10参照)はそれぞれ、付勢機構であって、第一ベース22に固定されている。このような抑えバネ242はそれぞれ、ホルダ241をZ方向-側(つまり、第一ベース22に向かう方向)に押圧する。これとともに、抑えバネ242はそれぞれ、Y方向両側からY方向中央に向けてホルダ241を押圧している。
[Retaining spring]
Each of the pair of holding springs 242 (see FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 10) is an urging mechanism, and is fixed to the first base 22. Each of the holding springs 242 presses the holder 241 in the Z direction-side (that is, the direction toward the first base 22). At the same time, the holding springs 242 press the holders 241 from both sides in the Y direction toward the center in the Y direction.
 具体的には、抑えバネ242はそれぞれ、第一ベース22における一対の第一側壁部224a、224bの一部(具体的には、Z方向+側の端面)に接着などの固定手段により固定されている。固定手段は、例えば、締結用部品(例えば、リベット、ボルト、ボルトおよびナットの組)を用いた固定手段でもよい。 Specifically, each of the holding springs 242 is fixed to a part of the pair of first side wall portions 224a and 224b (specifically, end surfaces on the Z direction + side) by a fixing means such as an adhesive. ing. The fixing means may be, for example, a fixing means using a fastening part (for example, a set of rivets, bolts, bolts and nuts).
 上述のような一対の抑えバネ242はそれぞれ、図10に示すように、金属製の板バネであって、固定基部242aおよび一対の押圧部242cを有する。 Each of the pair of holding springs 242 as described above is a metal leaf spring, as shown in FIG. 10, and has a fixed base portion 242a and a pair of pressing portions 242c.
 固定基部242aは、第一ベース22に固定される部分である。このような固定基部242aには、バネ側第一孔242e、バネ側第二孔242g、およびバネ側第三孔242iが形成されている。 The fixed base 242a is a portion fixed to the first base 22. In such a fixed base 242a, a spring-side first hole 242e, a spring-side second hole 242g, and a spring-side third hole 242i are formed.
 バネ側第一孔242eおよびバネ側第二孔242gには、第一ベース22の第一位置決め凸部226および第二位置決め凸部227が挿通されている(図2、3参照)。この構成により、ホルダ241からの反力による抑えバネ242のY方向のずれが防止される。 The first positioning projection 226 and the second positioning projection 227 of the first base 22 are inserted through the spring-side first hole 242e and the spring-side second hole 242g (see FIGS. 2 and 3). With this configuration, the displacement of the holding spring 242 in the Y direction due to the reaction force from the holder 241 is prevented.
 バネ側第三孔242iには、第一ベース22の第三位置決め凸部228が挿通されている(図2、3参照)。この構成により、抑えバネ242を第一ベース22に組み付ける際の位置決めが図られる。 The third positioning projection 228 of the first base 22 is inserted through the spring-side third hole 242i (see FIGS. 2 and 3). With this configuration, positioning when the holding spring 242 is assembled to the first base 22 is achieved.
 一対の押圧部242cはそれぞれ、固定基部242aの二箇所からホルダ241に近づく方向に延在している。このような一対の押圧部242cはそれぞれ、ホルダ241の被押圧部241iをZ方向-側に押圧している。これによりホルダ241の揺動支持部241cが、第一ベース22の第一軸受部225aに押し付けられている。また、一対の押圧部242cはそれぞれ、ホルダ241の被押圧部241iを、ホルダ241のY方向の中央に向けて押圧している。 Each of the pair of pressing parts 242c extends in a direction approaching the holder 241 from two places of the fixed base part 242a. Each of the pair of pressing portions 242c presses the pressed portion 241i of the holder 241 in the Z direction-side. Accordingly, the swing support portion 241 c of the holder 241 is pressed against the first bearing portion 225 a of the first base 22. Each of the pair of pressing portions 242c presses the pressed portion 241i of the holder 241 toward the center of the holder 241 in the Y direction.
 [第一アクチュエータ]
 第一アクチュエータ244(図4、6参照)は、第一軸を中心にホルダ241を揺動させる。本実施形態の場合、第一アクチュエータ244は、プリズム23の光路屈曲面231およびホルダ241とZ方向(つまり、第一光軸の方向)に重なるようにプリズム23およびホルダ241の裏側(つまり、Z方向-側)に配置されている。なお、本実施形態の場合、第一光軸の方向が、第一方向に相当する。
[First actuator]
The first actuator 244 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) swings the holder 241 about the first axis. In the case of the present embodiment, the first actuator 244 is disposed on the back side of the prism 23 and the holder 241 (that is, Z direction) so as to overlap the optical path bending surface 231 and the holder 241 of the prism 23 in the Z direction (that is, the direction of the first optical axis). (Direction-side). In the present embodiment, the direction of the first optical axis corresponds to the first direction.
 具体的には、第一アクチュエータ244は、第一マグネット244a、第一コイル244c、および第一ホール素子244eを備える。このような第一アクチュエータ244は、第一マグネット244aが可動側部材であるホルダ241に固定されるとともに第一コイル244cが固定側部材である第一ベース22に固定された、いわゆるムービングマグネット型のアクチュエータである。 Specifically, the first actuator 244 includes a first magnet 244a, a first coil 244c, and a first Hall element 244e. Such a first actuator 244 is a so-called moving magnet type in which a first magnet 244a is fixed to a holder 241 which is a movable member and a first coil 244c is fixed to a first base 22 which is a fixed member. Actuator.
 なお、第一アクチュエータ244は、第一コイル244cがホルダ241に固定されるとともに第一マグネット244aが第一ベース22に固定された、いわゆるムービングコイル型のアクチュエータであってもよい。このような第一アクチュエータ244を構成する各部の構造は、従来から知られている構造とほぼ同様であるため、詳しい説明は省略する。以下、第一アクチュエータ244を構成する各部の配置について説明する。 The first actuator 244 may be a so-called moving coil type actuator in which the first coil 244c is fixed to the holder 241 and the first magnet 244a is fixed to the first base 22. Since the structure of each part constituting the first actuator 244 is almost the same as a conventionally known structure, detailed description thereof is omitted. Hereinafter, the arrangement of each part constituting the first actuator 244 will be described.
 第一マグネット244aは、ホルダ241の裏側面(つまり、Z方向-側の面)に固定されている。本実施形態の場合、第一マグネット244aは、着磁方向がZ方向であって、片側に2つの磁極を有する。第一コイル244cおよび第一ホール素子244eは、第一ベース22の裏側面に固定された、フレキシブルプリント回路基板(以下、FPC)25の表面(つまり、Z方向+側の面)に固定されている。 The first magnet 244a is fixed to the back side surface of the holder 241 (that is, the surface on the Z direction side). In the present embodiment, the first magnet 244a has a magnetization direction in the Z direction and has two magnetic poles on one side. The first coil 244c and the first Hall element 244e are fixed to the surface of the flexible printed circuit board (hereinafter referred to as FPC) 25 (that is, the surface on the Z direction + side) fixed to the back side surface of the first base 22. Yes.
 第一コイル244cおよび第一ホール素子244eは、第一ベース22のベース第一開口部220(図4、6参照)に配置されている。なお、本実施形態の場合、第一コイル244cは、長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。第一ホール素子244eは、第一コイル244cの径方向の内側に配置されている。 The first coil 244c and the first hall element 244e are disposed in the base first opening 220 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) of the first base 22. In the case of the present embodiment, the first coil 244c is a so-called air-core coil having an oval shape. The first hall element 244e is disposed inside the first coil 244c in the radial direction.
 以上のような構成を有する第一アクチュエータ244の場合、手振れ補正用の制御部(図示省略)の制御下で、FPC25を介して第一コイル244cに電流が流れると、第一マグネット244aをX方向に変位させるローレンツ力が生じる。第一マグネット244aはホルダ241に固定されているため、上記ローレンツ力に基づいてホルダ241には、第一軸を中心としたモーメントが作用する。この結果、ホルダ241は、第一軸を中心に揺動する。第一コイル244cに流れる電流の向きを制御することにより、ホルダ241の変位方向が切り換わる。 In the case of the first actuator 244 having the above-described configuration, when a current flows through the first coil 244c via the FPC 25 under the control of a camera shake correction control unit (not shown), the first magnet 244a is moved in the X direction. A Lorentz force is generated that displaces the lens. Since the first magnet 244a is fixed to the holder 241, a moment about the first axis acts on the holder 241 based on the Lorentz force. As a result, the holder 241 swings around the first axis. By controlling the direction of the current flowing through the first coil 244c, the displacement direction of the holder 241 is switched.
 [1.1.3 レンズモジュールについて]
 レンズモジュール3は、図11~19に示すように、第二カバー31、第二ベース32、レンズ部33、AF装置36、第二振れ補正装置37、および基準部材38を備える。
[1.1.3 Lens module]
The lens module 3 includes a second cover 31, a second base 32, a lens unit 33, an AF device 36, a second shake correction device 37, and a reference member 38, as shown in FIGS.
 [第二カバー]
 第二カバー31は、例えば合成樹脂製または非磁性金属製であり、X方向両側およびZ方向-側(つまり、裏側)が開口した箱状部材である。以上のような第二カバー31は、後述する第二ベース32にZ方向+側から組み合わされる。
[Second cover]
The second cover 31 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin or a nonmagnetic metal, and is a box-shaped member that is open on both sides in the X direction and on the Z direction-side (that is, the back side). The second cover 31 as described above is combined with the second base 32 to be described later from the Z direction + side.
 [第二ベース]
 第二ベース32(図14、15参照)は、上述の第二カバー31と組み合わされることにより、レンズ部33、AF装置36、および第二振れ補正装置37を配置可能な第二収容空間320(図11参照)を形成する。
[Second base]
The second base 32 (see FIGS. 14 and 15) is combined with the above-described second cover 31, whereby the second accommodation space 320 (in which the lens unit 33, the AF device 36, and the second shake correction device 37 can be disposed). 11).
 第二ベース32は、底面部321および一対の第二側壁部322a、322bを有する。底面部321は、合成樹脂製の基部と、当該基部にインサート成形された金属製の補強プレート323とを有する。このような補強プレート323は、底面部321の高剛性化、薄肉化に資する。 The second base 32 has a bottom surface portion 321 and a pair of second side wall portions 322a and 322b. The bottom surface portion 321 includes a base portion made of synthetic resin and a metal reinforcing plate 323 insert-molded on the base portion. Such a reinforcing plate 323 contributes to increase in rigidity and thickness of the bottom surface portion 321.
 第二ベース32の補強プレート323は、後述するレンズガイド361よりもZ方向-側に、レンズガイド361に対して重なるように配置されている。具体的には、レンズガイド361がオートフォーカスの動作の際に移動可能な範囲(つまり、X方向に移動可能な範囲)および振れ補正の動作の際に移動可能な範囲(つまり、Y方向に移動可能な範囲)の何れの位置に存在する場合でも、補強プレート323のZ方向+側にはレンズガイド361が存在するようにしている。このため、補強プレート323の表面(つまり、Z方向+側の面)は、常にレンズガイド361により覆われて露出していない。これにより、補強プレート323による反射光が、レンズ部33、ひいては後述する撮像素子モジュール4の撮像素子に入光しないようにしている。 The reinforcing plate 323 of the second base 32 is disposed so as to overlap the lens guide 361 on the Z direction-side with respect to a lens guide 361 described later. Specifically, a range in which the lens guide 361 can move during autofocus operation (ie, a range that can move in the X direction) and a range that can move during shake correction operation (ie, move in the Y direction). The lens guide 361 is present on the Z direction + side of the reinforcing plate 323 regardless of the position in any possible range. For this reason, the surface of the reinforcing plate 323 (that is, the surface on the + Z direction side) is always covered with the lens guide 361 and is not exposed. Thereby, the reflected light from the reinforcing plate 323 is prevented from entering the lens unit 33 and eventually the image sensor of the image sensor module 4 described later.
 底面部321における補強プレート323のY方向両側部分には、それぞれ底面貫通孔321a、321b(図15参照)が形成されている。底面貫通孔321a、321bには、後述する一対のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bのAF用コイル366a、366bが配置されている(図5、11参照)。 Bottom face through- holes 321a and 321b (see FIG. 15) are formed on both sides in the Y direction of the reinforcing plate 323 in the bottom face portion 321. AF coils 366a and 366b of a pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b, which will be described later, are disposed in the bottom surface through holes 321a and 321b (see FIGS. 5 and 11).
 第二側壁部322a、322bはそれぞれ、底面部321のY方向両端部からZ方向+側に延在している。第二側壁部322a、322bはそれぞれ、コイル載置部322d、322eを有する。このようなコイル載置部322d、322eにはそれぞれ、後述する第二振れ補正装置37の第二コイル372a、372bが載置されている(図5、11参照)。 Each of the second side wall portions 322a and 322b extends from the Y direction both ends of the bottom surface portion 321 to the Z direction + side. The second side wall portions 322a and 322b have coil placement portions 322d and 322e, respectively. Second coils 372a and 372b of a second shake correction device 37, which will be described later, are placed on the coil placement portions 322d and 322e, respectively (see FIGS. 5 and 11).
 また、一対のコイル載置部322d、322eと底面部321との間には、一対のマグネット用空間322g、322h(図11参照)が形成されている。このようなマグネット用空間322g、322hにはそれぞれ、後述する一対のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bのAF用マグネット365a、365bが配置されている。 In addition, a pair of magnet spaces 322g and 322h (see FIG. 11) are formed between the pair of coil placement portions 322d and 322e and the bottom surface portion 321. In the magnet spaces 322g and 322h, AF magnets 365a and 365b of a pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b described later are disposed, respectively.
 本実施形態の場合、底面貫通孔321a、321bとコイル載置部322d、322eとがZ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なっている。したがって、底面貫通孔321a、321bに配置されているAF用コイル366a、366bと、コイル載置部322d、322eに載置されている第二コイル372a、372bとが、Z方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なっている。 In the case of the present embodiment, the bottom through- holes 321a and 321b and the coil mounting portions 322d and 322e overlap with each other at a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Therefore, the AF coils 366a and 366b disposed in the bottom surface through- holes 321a and 321b and the second coils 372a and 372b mounted on the coil mounting portions 322d and 322e have a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Open and overlap.
 また、第二側壁部322aは、Y方向+側の側面におけるX方向両端部に、後述するスプリング362a、362cを配置するためのスプリング配置部324a、324c(図2参照)を有する。一方、第二側壁部322bは、Y方向-側の側面におけるX方向両端部に、後述するスプリング362b、362dを配置するためのスプリング配置部324b、324d(図3参照)を有する。なお、スプリング配置部324a~324dにはそれぞれ、スプリング362a~362dを覆ったゲル状の制震部材が配置されてもよい。 Further, the second side wall portion 322a has spring placement portions 324a and 324c (see FIG. 2) for placing springs 362a and 362c, which will be described later, at both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the Y direction + side. On the other hand, the second side wall portion 322b has spring arrangement portions 324b and 324d (see FIG. 3) for arranging springs 362b and 362d described later on both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the Y direction minus side. Note that gel-like damping members covering the springs 362a to 362d may be arranged in the spring arrangement portions 324a to 324d, respectively.
 [レンズ部]
 レンズ部33は、後述するレンズガイド361に保持された状態で、第二収容空間320に配置されている。このようなレンズ部33は、筒状のレンズバレル、および、レンズバレルに保持された1以上のレンズを有する。一例として、レンズ部33は、レンズバレルのX方向-側の端部とレンズバレルのX方向+側の端部との間に固定された、たとえば光学3倍以上の望遠レンズ群を有する。なお、レンズ部33の構造は、上述の構造に限定されない。
[Lens part]
The lens unit 33 is disposed in the second accommodation space 320 while being held by a lens guide 361 described later. Such a lens part 33 has a cylindrical lens barrel and one or more lenses held in the lens barrel. As an example, the lens unit 33 includes a telephoto lens group having, for example, an optical triplex or more, which is fixed between the X-direction end of the lens barrel and the X-direction end of the lens barrel. In addition, the structure of the lens part 33 is not limited to the above-mentioned structure.
 [AF装置]
 AF装置36(図5参照)は、オートフォーカスを目的として、レンズ部33をX方向に変位させる。具体的には、AF装置36は、レンズガイド361、複数個(本実施形態の場合4個)のスプリング362a~362d、FPC363、および一対のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bを有している。
[AF device]
The AF device 36 (see FIG. 5) displaces the lens unit 33 in the X direction for the purpose of autofocus. Specifically, the AF device 36 includes a lens guide 361, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) springs 362a to 362d, an FPC 363, and a pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b.
 [レンズガイド]
 レンズガイド361(図11、16参照)は、レンズバレルを保持可能な収容空間を有する。このようなレンズガイド361は、X方向(つまり、第二光軸の方向)およびY方向の変位を可能な状態で、上述の第二収容空間320に配置されている。
[Lens guide]
The lens guide 361 (see FIGS. 11 and 16) has a housing space capable of holding the lens barrel. Such a lens guide 361 is disposed in the above-described second accommodation space 320 in a state where displacement in the X direction (that is, the direction of the second optical axis) and the Y direction is possible.
 レンズガイド361は、後述する一対のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bのAF用マグネット365a、365bを保持する一対の第一マグネット保持部361a、361b(図11参照)を有する。本実施形態の場合、一対の第一マグネット保持部361a、361bはそれぞれ、第二ベース32のマグネット用空間322g、322hに配置されている。 The lens guide 361 has a pair of first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b (see FIG. 11) for holding AF magnets 365a and 365b of a pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b described later. In the case of the present embodiment, the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b are disposed in the magnet spaces 322g and 322h of the second base 32, respectively.
 レンズガイド361は、後述する一対の第二アクチュエータ370a、370bの第二マグネット371a、371bを保持する一対の第二マグネット保持部368a、368b(図11参照)を有する。本実施形態の場合、一対の第二マグネット保持部368a、368bはそれぞれ、第二ベース32のコイル載置部322d、322eとZ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なっている。 The lens guide 361 has a pair of second magnet holding portions 368a and 368b (see FIG. 11) for holding second magnets 371a and 371b of a pair of second actuators 370a and 370b described later. In the case of the present embodiment, the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a and 368b respectively overlap with the coil placement portions 322d and 322e of the second base 32 with a predetermined interval in the Z direction.
 [スプリング]
 複数個(本実施形態の場合4個)のスプリング362a~362d(図12、13、17参照)は、レンズガイド361を第二ベース32に弾性的に支持している。この状態で、レンズ部33は、第二ベース32に対してX方向およびY方向に変位できる。
[spring]
A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) springs 362 a to 362 d (see FIGS. 12, 13, and 17) elastically support the lens guide 361 on the second base 32. In this state, the lens unit 33 can be displaced in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the second base 32.
 本実施形態の場合、スプリング362aは、レンズガイド361のX方向+側かつY方向+側の端部を第二ベース32に支持している(図12参照)。スプリング362bは、レンズガイド361のX方向+側かつY方向-側の端部を第二ベース32に支持している(図13参照)。スプリング362cは、レンズガイド361のX方向-側かつY方向+側の端部を第二ベース32に支持している(図12参照)。さらに、スプリング362dは、レンズガイド361のX方向-側かつY方向-側の端部を第二ベース32に支持している(図13参照)。 In the case of the present embodiment, the spring 362a supports the end of the lens guide 361 on the X direction + side and the Y direction + side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 12). The spring 362b supports the end of the lens guide 361 on the X direction + side and the Y direction − side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 13). The spring 362c supports the end of the lens guide 361 on the X direction − side and the Y direction + side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 12). Further, the spring 362d supports the end of the lens guide 361 on the X direction side and the Y direction side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 13).
 スプリング362a~362dはそれぞれ、第一固定部362f、第二固定部362g、および弾性変形部362h(図17参照)を有する。尚、図17は、組付状態における配置のままのスプリング362a~362dを示している。 Each of the springs 362a to 362d has a first fixing portion 362f, a second fixing portion 362g, and an elastic deformation portion 362h (see FIG. 17). FIG. 17 shows the springs 362a to 362d as they are in the assembled state.
 第一固定部362fは、可動側部材であるレンズガイド361に固定されている。第二固定部362gは、固定側部材である第二ベース32に固定されている。弾性変形部362hは、第一固定部362fと第二固定部362gとを連続している。弾性変形部362hは、例えば、蛇行状に曲げ成形された線状部材からなる。 The first fixed portion 362f is fixed to a lens guide 361 which is a movable side member. The second fixed portion 362g is fixed to the second base 32 that is a fixed side member. The elastic deformation part 362h is continuous with the first fixing part 362f and the second fixing part 362g. The elastic deformation portion 362h is made of a linear member that is bent in a meandering manner, for example.
 なお、本実施形態の場合、弾性変形部362hは、X方向において方向性を有している。上述のスプリング362a~362dはそれぞれ、弾性変形部362hのX方向における方向性が同じ状態で配置されている。 In the case of this embodiment, the elastically deformable portion 362h has directionality in the X direction. The above-described springs 362a to 362d are arranged with the same directionality in the X direction of the elastic deformation portion 362h.
 本実施形態の場合、図17に示すように、Z方向から見てレンズガイド361の対角位置に配置されたスプリング362aの中心とスプリング362dの中心とを結んだ線分をLとし、スプリング362bの中心とスプリング362cの中心とを結んだ線分をLとした場合に、LとLとの交点(分散配置の中心位置ともいう。)が、基準位置における可動部の重心Gと一致またはほぼ一致している。なお、可動部とは、本実施形態の場合、レンズガイド361、および、レンズガイド361に固定され、レンズガイド361とともに変位可能な各部材をいう。具体的には、本実施形態の場合、可動部は、レンズガイド361、レンズ部33、一対のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bのAF用マグネット365a、365b、後述する一対の第二アクチュエータ370a、370bの第二マグネット371a、371b、およびシールド板6a、6bを含んで構成される。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the line segment connecting the centers of the spring 362d of the spring 362a disposed in diagonal positions of the lens guide 361 as viewed from the Z direction and L 1, spring the line segment connecting the centers of the spring 362c of the 362b in the case of the L 2, (also referred to as a center position of the distributed.) intersection between L 1 and L 2 is, of the movable portion in the reference position the center of gravity G Match or nearly match. In the present embodiment, the movable portion refers to the lens guide 361 and each member fixed to the lens guide 361 and capable of being displaced together with the lens guide 361. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the movable portion includes the lens guide 361, the lens portion 33, the AF magnets 365a and 365b of the pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b, and the second actuators 370a and 370b described later. Two magnets 371a and 371b and shield plates 6a and 6b are included.
 各スプリングの中心とは、例えば、各スプリングのZ方向の中央位置かつX方向中央位置である。また、レンズガイド361の基準位置とは、オートフォーカス機能によりレンズガイド361がX方向に変位していない状態、かつ、後述する第二振れ補正装置37によりY方向に変位していない状態をいう。このような構成により、上記可動部の重心を通りかつZ方向に平行な直線L周りのレンズガイド361の共振が低減される。 The center of each spring is, for example, the center position in the Z direction and the center position in the X direction of each spring. The reference position of the lens guide 361 refers to a state in which the lens guide 361 is not displaced in the X direction by the autofocus function and a state in which the lens guide 361 is not displaced in the Y direction by the second shake correction device 37 described later. With this configuration, resonance of the lens guide 361 around the straight line L 3 centroid parallel to the street and Z direction of the movable portion can be reduced.
 なお、上述のような各スプリング362a~362dは、以下のようにして配置される。上記重心Gを通り第二光軸の方向(つまり、X方向)に平行な直線を直線L(図17参照)とした場合に、X方向+側の一対のスプリング362a、362bは、上記直線Lに関して対称、かつ、重心GからX方向+側(図17の右側)に所定距離だけ離れた2箇所位置に配置される。一方、X方向-側の一対のスプリング362c、362dは、上記直線Lに関して対称、かつ、重心GからX方向-側(図17の左側)に上記所定距離だけ離れた2箇所位置に配置される。これにより、上記直線Lと上記直線Lとの交点が、上記重心Gに一致する。 The springs 362a to 362d as described above are arranged as follows. When a straight line passing through the center of gravity G and parallel to the direction of the second optical axis (that is, the X direction) is a straight line L 4 (see FIG. 17), the pair of springs 362a and 362b on the X direction + side are and symmetrically with respect to L 4, it is arranged at a predetermined distance apart two positions in the X-direction positive side from the center of gravity G (right side in FIG. 17). On the other hand, X-direction - the side of the pair of springs 362c, 362d are symmetrical with respect to the straight line L 4, and, X-direction from the center of gravity G - arranged at the predetermined distance apart two positions (the left side in FIG. 17) side The Thus, the intersection between the straight line L 1 and the straight line L 2 coincides with the center of gravity G.
 [FPC]
 FPC363(図11、18参照)は、フレキシブルプリント回路基板であって、第二ベース32に固定されている。このようなFPC363は、例えば、後述するAF装置36および第二振れ補正装置37の第二アクチュエータ370a、370bに電力を供給する。
[FPC]
The FPC 363 (see FIGS. 11 and 18) is a flexible printed circuit board and is fixed to the second base 32. Such an FPC 363 supplies electric power to, for example, an AF device 36 and second actuators 370a and 370b of the second shake correction device 37 which will be described later.
 具体的には、FPC363は、連続した一枚のフレキシブルプリント回路基板であって、一対の第一コイル固定部363a、363bおよび一対の第二コイル固定部363d、363eを有する。 Specifically, the FPC 363 is a continuous flexible printed circuit board, and includes a pair of first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b and a pair of second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e.
 第一コイル固定部363aには、AF装置36のAF用コイル366a(図11参照)が基板7aを介して固定されている。この状態で、第一コイル固定部363aおよびAF用コイル366aは、第二ベース32の底面貫通孔321aに配置されている。 In the first coil fixing portion 363a, an AF coil 366a (see FIG. 11) of the AF device 36 is fixed via a substrate 7a. In this state, the first coil fixing portion 363 a and the AF coil 366 a are disposed in the bottom surface through-hole 321 a of the second base 32.
 一方、第一コイル固定部363bには、AF装置36のAF用コイル366b(図11参照)が、基板7bを介して固定されている。この状態で、第一コイル固定部363bおよびAF用コイル366bは、第二ベース32の底面貫通孔321bに配置されている。なお、上述の基板7a、7bは、第一コイル固定部363a、363bに、はんだにより固定されている。このような構造に対して、第一コイル固定部363a、363bにFPC補強板を設ける場合には、上述の基板7a、7bを省略して、AF用コイル366a、366bを、FPC363に直接設けることもできる。このような構造の場合には、基板7a、7bを省略できるため、基板7a、7bと第一コイル固定部363a、363bとのはんだも不要となる。 On the other hand, the AF coil 366b (see FIG. 11) of the AF device 36 is fixed to the first coil fixing portion 363b via the substrate 7b. In this state, the first coil fixing portion 363b and the AF coil 366b are disposed in the bottom surface through hole 321b of the second base 32. The above-described substrates 7a and 7b are fixed to the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b with solder. In contrast to such a structure, when the FPC reinforcing plate is provided on the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b, the above-described substrates 7a and 7b are omitted, and the AF coils 366a and 366b are directly provided on the FPC 363. You can also. In the case of such a structure, since the boards 7a and 7b can be omitted, soldering between the boards 7a and 7b and the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b is also unnecessary.
 第二コイル固定部363d、363eはそれぞれ、第一コイル固定部363a、363bに対してZ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なっている。第二コイル固定部363d、363eの表面にはそれぞれ、後述する第二振れ補正装置37の第二コイル372a、372bが固定されている(図11参照)。この状態で、第二コイル固定部363d、363eはそれぞれ、第二ベース32のコイル載置部322d、322eの表面に載置されている。 The second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e respectively overlap the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b with a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Second coils 372a and 372b of a second shake correction device 37 to be described later are fixed to the surfaces of the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e, respectively (see FIG. 11). In this state, the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e are respectively placed on the surfaces of the coil placement portions 322d and 322e of the second base 32.
 [AFアクチュエータ]
 一対のAFアクチュエータ364a、364b(図11参照)はそれぞれ、オートフォーカス用となる第三アクチュエータである。Y方向+側のAFアクチュエータ364aは、AF用マグネット365a、およびAF用コイル366aを有する。一方、Y方向-側のAFアクチュエータ364bは、AF用マグネット365b、AF用コイル366b、およびAF用ホール素子367を有する。
[AF actuator]
Each of the pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b (see FIG. 11) is a third actuator for autofocus. The Y direction + side AF actuator 364a includes an AF magnet 365a and an AF coil 366a. On the other hand, the Y direction negative side AF actuator 364b includes an AF magnet 365b, an AF coil 366b, and an AF Hall element 367.
 このようなAFアクチュエータ364a、364bはそれぞれ、AF用マグネット365a、365bが可動側部材であるレンズガイド361に固定されるとともに、AF用コイル366a、366bが固定側部材である第二ベース32にFPC363を介して固定されたムービングマグネット型のアクチュエータである。 In such AF actuators 364a and 364b, the AF magnets 365a and 365b are fixed to the lens guide 361 which is a movable side member, and the AF coils 366a and 366b are fixed to the second base 32 which is a fixed side member. It is a moving magnet type actuator fixed via the.
 なお、AFアクチュエータ364a、364bはムービングコイル型のアクチュエータであってもよい。このようなAFアクチュエータ364a、364bを構成する各部の構造は、従来から知られている構造とほぼ同様であるため、詳しい説明は省略する。以下、AFアクチュエータ364a、364bを構成する各部の配置について説明する。 The AF actuators 364a and 364b may be moving coil actuators. Since the structure of each part constituting such AF actuators 364a and 364b is substantially the same as a conventionally known structure, detailed description thereof is omitted. Hereinafter, the arrangement of the respective parts constituting the AF actuators 364a and 364b will be described.
 AF用マグネット365a、365bはそれぞれ、レンズガイド361の第一マグネット保持部361a、361bに保持されている。この状態でAF用マグネット365a、365bはそれぞれ、第二ベース32のマグネット用空間322g、322h(図11参照)に配置されている。本実施形態の場合、AF用マグネット365a、365bはそれぞれ、Z方向に着磁され、片側に二つの磁極を有する。 The AF magnets 365a and 365b are held by the first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b of the lens guide 361, respectively. In this state, the AF magnets 365a and 365b are disposed in the magnet spaces 322g and 322h (see FIG. 11) of the second base 32, respectively. In this embodiment, the AF magnets 365a and 365b are each magnetized in the Z direction and have two magnetic poles on one side.
 AF用コイル366a、366bは、長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。AF用コイル366a、366bは、長軸がY方向に一致した状態で、FPC363の第一コイル固定部363a、363bに基板7a、7bを介して固定されている。AF用ホール素子367は、AF用コイル366bの径方向の内側に配置されている。 The AF coils 366a and 366b are so-called air-core coils having an oval shape. The AF coils 366a and 366b are fixed to the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b of the FPC 363 via the substrates 7a and 7b in a state where the long axis coincides with the Y direction. The AF hall element 367 is disposed inside the AF coil 366b in the radial direction.
 以上のような構成を有するAFアクチュエータ364a、364bの場合、オートフォーカス用の制御部(図示省略)の制御下でFPC363を介してAF用コイル366a、366bに電流が流れると、AF用マグネット365a、365bをX方向に変位させるローレンツ力が生じる。AF用マグネット365a、365bはレンズガイド361に固定されているため、上記ローレンツ力に基づいてレンズガイド361が、X方向(第三方向ともいう。)に変位する。なお、AF用コイル366a、366bに流れる電流の向きを制御することにより、レンズガイド361の変位方向が切り換わる。このようにしてオートフォーカスが行われる。 In the case of the AF actuators 364a and 364b configured as described above, when a current flows through the AF coils 366a and 366b through the FPC 363 under the control of an autofocus control unit (not shown), the AF magnets 365a and A Lorentz force is generated that displaces 365b in the X direction. Since the AF magnets 365a and 365b are fixed to the lens guide 361, the lens guide 361 is displaced in the X direction (also referred to as a third direction) based on the Lorentz force. Note that the direction of displacement of the lens guide 361 is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the AF coils 366a and 366b. In this way, autofocus is performed.
 なお、本実施形態の場合、上述のようにスプリング362a~362dおよびレンズガイド361の配置を工夫することにより上記直線L(図17参照)周りのレンズガイド361の共振を低減している。ただし、当該共振を完全になくすことができない場合には、AFアクチュエータ364aの駆動力とAFアクチュエータ364bの駆動力に差をつけることにより、当該共振を相殺する方向にレンズガイド361を揺動させてもよい。なお、AFアクチュエータ364a、364bに流す電流を異ならせることにより、AFアクチュエータ364a、364b同士の駆動力に差をつけることができる。 In the present embodiment, as described above, the resonance of the lens guide 361 around the straight line L 3 (see FIG. 17) is reduced by devising the arrangement of the springs 362a to 362d and the lens guide 361. However, if the resonance cannot be completely eliminated, the lens guide 361 is swung in a direction to cancel the resonance by making a difference between the driving force of the AF actuator 364a and the driving force of the AF actuator 364b. Also good. Note that, by making the currents flowing through the AF actuators 364a and 364b different, the driving force between the AF actuators 364a and 364b can be made different.
 [第二振れ補正装置]
 第二振れ補正装置37(図5参照)は、レンズ部33をY方向(第二方向ともいう。)に変位させることにより、Y方向の振れ補正を行う。このような第二振れ補正装置37は、上述の第二収容空間320(図4参照)に配置されている。
[Second shake correction device]
The second shake correction device 37 (see FIG. 5) performs shake correction in the Y direction by displacing the lens unit 33 in the Y direction (also referred to as the second direction). Such a second shake correction device 37 is arranged in the above-described second accommodation space 320 (see FIG. 4).
 第二振れ補正装置37は、上述したレンズガイド361、上述した複数個のスプリング362a~362d、上述したFPC363、および一対の第二アクチュエータ370a、370bを有する。レンズガイド361、スプリング362a~362d、およびFPC363は、AF装置36と共通である。 The second shake correction device 37 includes the lens guide 361 described above, the plurality of springs 362a to 362d described above, the FPC 363 described above, and a pair of second actuators 370a and 370b. The lens guide 361, the springs 362a to 362d, and the FPC 363 are common to the AF device 36.
 Y方向+側の第二アクチュエータ370a(図11参照)は、上述のAFアクチュエータ364aに対して、Z方向(第一方向ともいう。)に所定の間隔をあけて重なった状態で配置されている。このような第二アクチュエータ370aは、第二マグネット371a、および第二コイル372aを有する。 The second actuator 370a (see FIG. 11) on the Y direction + side is arranged in a state of being overlapped with a predetermined interval in the Z direction (also referred to as the first direction) with respect to the AF actuator 364a. . Such a second actuator 370a has a second magnet 371a and a second coil 372a.
 一方、Y方向-側の第二アクチュエータ370bは、上述のAFアクチュエータ364bに対して、Z方向(第一方向ともいう。)に所定の間隔をあけて重なった状態で配置されている。このような第二アクチュエータ370bは、第二マグネット371b、第二コイル372b、および第二ホール素子373を有する。 On the other hand, the second actuator 370b on the Y direction minus side is arranged in a state of being overlapped with the above-described AF actuator 364b at a predetermined interval in the Z direction (also referred to as the first direction). Such a second actuator 370b includes a second magnet 371b, a second coil 372b, and a second Hall element 373.
 第二アクチュエータ370a、370bとAFアクチュエータ364a、364bとを上述のように配置することにより、第二アクチュエータ370a、370bの駆動力の中心が、AFアクチュエータ364a、364bの駆動力の中心に一致する。この構成により、オートフォーカスおよび振れ補正の際、レンズガイド361がチルト変位(つまり、X方向またはY方向に平行な軸を中心とした揺動変位)しにくくなる。 By arranging the second actuators 370a and 370b and the AF actuators 364a and 364b as described above, the centers of the driving forces of the second actuators 370a and 370b coincide with the centers of the driving forces of the AF actuators 364a and 364b. This configuration makes it difficult for the lens guide 361 to be tilt-displaced (that is, swinging displacement about an axis parallel to the X direction or the Y direction) during autofocus and shake correction.
 上述のような第二アクチュエータ370a、370bはそれぞれ、第二マグネット371a、371bが可動側部材であるレンズガイド361に固定されるとともに第二コイル372a、372bが固定側部材である第二ベース32にFPC363を介して固定されたムービングマグネット型のアクチュエータである。ただし、第二アクチュエータ370a、370bはムービングコイル型のアクチュエータであってもよい。 In the second actuators 370a and 370b as described above, the second magnets 371a and 371b are fixed to the lens guide 361 which is a movable member, and the second coils 372a and 372b are fixed to the second base 32 which is a fixed member. This is a moving magnet type actuator fixed via an FPC 363. However, the second actuators 370a and 370b may be moving coil type actuators.
 このような第二アクチュエータ370a、370bを構成する各部の構造は、従来から知られている構造とほぼ同様であるため、詳しい説明は省略する。以下、第二アクチュエータ370a、370bを構成する各部の配置について説明する。 Since the structure of each part constituting the second actuators 370a and 370b is almost the same as a conventionally known structure, detailed description thereof is omitted. Hereinafter, the arrangement of each part constituting the second actuators 370a and 370b will be described.
 第二マグネット371a、371bはそれぞれ、レンズガイド361の第二マグネット保持部368a、368bに保持されている。本実施形態の場合、第二マグネット371a、371bはそれぞれ、Z方向に着磁され、片側に二つの磁極を有する。 The second magnets 371a and 371b are held by the second magnet holding portions 368a and 368b of the lens guide 361, respectively. In the present embodiment, the second magnets 371a and 371b are each magnetized in the Z direction and have two magnetic poles on one side.
 第二コイル372a、372bはそれぞれ、長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。第二コイル372a、372bはそれぞれ、長軸がX方向に一致した状態で、FPC363の第二コイル固定部363d、363eに固定されている。 The second coils 372a and 372b are so-called air-core coils each having an oval shape. The second coils 372a and 372b are respectively fixed to the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e of the FPC 363 in a state where the long axis coincides with the X direction.
 この状態で、第二コイル372a、372bはそれぞれ、第二マグネット371a、371bとZ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なっている。第二ホール素子373は、FPC363の第二コイル固定部363eの表面、かつ、第二コイル372bの径方向の外側に固定されている。なお、第二ホール素子373は、第二コイル372bの径方向の内側に配置されてもよい。 In this state, the second coils 372a and 372b respectively overlap the second magnets 371a and 371b with a predetermined interval in the Z direction. The second Hall element 373 is fixed on the surface of the second coil fixing portion 363e of the FPC 363 and on the outer side in the radial direction of the second coil 372b. Note that the second Hall element 373 may be arranged inside the second coil 372b in the radial direction.
 以上のような構成を有する第二アクチュエータ370a、370bの場合、手振れ補正用の制御部(図示省略)の制御下で、FPC363を介して第二コイル372a、372bに電流が流れると、第二マグネット371a、371bをY方向に変位させるローレンツ力が生じる。第二マグネット371a、371bはそれぞれレンズガイド361に固定されているため、上記ローレンツ力に基づいてレンズガイド361が、Y方向に変位する。なお、第二コイル372a、372bに流れる電流の向きを制御することにより、レンズガイド361の変位方向が切り換わる。 In the case of the second actuators 370a and 370b having the above-described configuration, when a current flows through the second coils 372a and 372b through the FPC 363 under the control of a shake correction controller (not shown), the second magnet Lorentz force that displaces 371a and 371b in the Y direction is generated. Since the second magnets 371a and 371b are respectively fixed to the lens guide 361, the lens guide 361 is displaced in the Y direction based on the Lorentz force. The direction of displacement of the lens guide 361 is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the second coils 372a and 372b.
 なお、本実施形態の場合、第二アクチュエータ370a、370bと、AFアクチュエータ364a、364bとのクロストークを防止するために、第二マグネット371a、371bとAF用マグネット365a、365bとのZ方向の間部分に、磁性金属製のシールド板6a、6bが配置されている。 In the case of the present embodiment, in order to prevent crosstalk between the second actuators 370a and 370b and the AF actuators 364a and 364b, it is between the second magnets 371a and 371b and the AF magnets 365a and 365b in the Z direction. Magnetic metal shield plates 6a and 6b are arranged in the portion.
 [基準部材]
 基準部材38(図12、19参照)は、第二ベース32のX方向+側の端部に固定された板状部材である。このような基準部材38のX方向+側の側面は、後述する撮像素子モジュール4のX方向の基準面となる。基準部材38の中央部には、レンズ部33を通過した光を撮像素子モジュール4に導光する貫通孔38aが形成されている。
[Reference material]
The reference member 38 (see FIGS. 12 and 19) is a plate-like member fixed to the end portion on the X direction + side of the second base 32. The side surface on the + X direction side of the reference member 38 becomes a reference surface in the X direction of the image sensor module 4 described later. A through hole 38 a that guides the light that has passed through the lens portion 33 to the imaging element module 4 is formed in the central portion of the reference member 38.
 基準部材38のX方向-側の側面には、オートフォーカスの際のレンズ部33のX方向+側の変位を所定範囲に規制する一対のストッパ部380a、380bが設けられている。このようなストッパ部380a、380bのX方向-側の端面(以下、単に「ストッパ面」という。)はそれぞれ、図5に示すように、レンズガイド361が基準位置にある状態で、レンズガイド361の一部とX方向に所定間隔をあけて対向している。 A pair of stopper portions 380a and 380b are provided on the side surface on the X direction side of the reference member 38 to restrict the displacement of the lens portion 33 on the X direction + side during autofocusing to a predetermined range. As shown in FIG. 5, the end surfaces on the X direction − side of the stopper portions 380a and 380b (hereinafter simply referred to as “stopper surfaces”) are in the state where the lens guide 361 is at the reference position, as shown in FIG. It faces a part of the X-direction with a predetermined interval.
 本実施形態の場合、上記各ストッパ面はそれぞれ、レンズガイド361の第一マグネット保持部361a、361bのX方向+側の端面(以下、「第一被ストッパ面」という。)とX方向に対面している。レンズガイド361が上記所定間隔よりも大きくX方向+側に変位すると、上記第一被ストッパ面が上記ストッパ面に突き当たる。このようにして、レンズガイド361は、Y方向+側の変位が所定範囲に規制されている。 In the case of the present embodiment, each of the stopper surfaces faces the end surface on the X direction + side of the first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b of the lens guide 361 (hereinafter referred to as “first stoppered surface”) in the X direction. is doing. When the lens guide 361 is displaced in the X direction + side larger than the predetermined interval, the first stopper surface comes into contact with the stopper surface. In this way, in the lens guide 361, the displacement in the Y direction + side is regulated within a predetermined range.
 一方、レンズガイド361は、レンズガイド361の第一マグネット保持部361a、361bのX方向-側の端面(以下、「第二被ストッパ面」という。)と、当該第二被ストッパ面とX方向に対向する第二ベース32の一部(第二ストッパ面ともいう。)とにより、Y方向-側の変位が所定範囲に規制されている。 On the other hand, the lens guide 361 has an X-direction end surface (hereinafter referred to as “second stoppered surface”) of the first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b of the lens guide 361, the second stoppered surface and the X direction. The displacement on the negative side in the Y direction is restricted to a predetermined range by a part of the second base 32 (also referred to as a second stopper surface) that faces the surface.
 また、レンズガイド361は、第一マグネット保持部361a、361bのY方向両端面と、第二ベース32の一対の第二側壁部322a、322bとにより、Y方向の変位が所定範囲に規制されている。 Further, the lens guide 361 has its displacement in the Y direction restricted within a predetermined range by both end surfaces of the first magnet holding portions 361a and 361b in the Y direction and the pair of second side wall portions 322a and 322b of the second base 32. Yes.
 また、レンズガイド361は、レンズガイド361のZ方向+側の端面と第二カバー31とによりZ方向+側の変位が所定範囲に規制されている。さらに、レンズガイド361は、レンズガイド361のZ方向-側の端面と第二ベース32の底面部321とによりZ方向-側の変位が所定範囲に規制されている。 Further, the displacement of the lens guide 361 in the Z direction + side is regulated within a predetermined range by the end surface on the Z direction + side of the lens guide 361 and the second cover 31. Further, the displacement of the lens guide 361 in the Z direction-side is restricted to a predetermined range by the end surface of the lens guide 361 in the Z direction-side and the bottom surface portion 321 of the second base 32.
 なお、ストッパ部380aよりもY方向+側にスプリング362aを配置可能なスプリング配置部324a(図2、3参照)が形成されている。一方、ストッパ部380bよりもY方向-側にスプリング362bを配置可能なスプリング配置部324bが形成されている。 In addition, the spring arrangement | positioning part 324a (refer FIG. 2, 3) which can arrange | position the spring 362a to the Y direction + side rather than the stopper part 380a is formed. On the other hand, a spring arrangement part 324b is formed in which the spring 362b can be arranged on the Y direction minus side from the stopper part 380b.
 スプリング配置部324a、324bにはそれぞれ、スプリング362a、362bを覆ったゲル状の制震部材が配置されてもよい。 Gel-shaped damping members that cover the springs 362a and 362b may be disposed in the spring placement portions 324a and 324b, respectively.
 [1.1.4 撮像素子モジュール]
 撮像素子モジュール4は、レンズ部33よりもX方向+側に配置されている。撮像素子モジュール4は、例えばCCD(charge-coupled device)型イメージセンサー、CMOS(complementary metal oxide semiconductor)型イメージセンサー等の撮像素子を含んで構成される。撮像素子モジュール4の撮像素子は、レンズ部33により結像された被写体像を撮像し、被写体像に対応する電気信号を出力する。撮像素子モジュール4の基板(図示省略)にはプリント配線基板(図示省略)が電気的に接続され、このプリント配線基板を介して撮像素子モジュール4への給電及び撮像素子モジュール4で撮像された被写体像の電気信号の出力が行われる。このような撮像素子モジュール4は、従来から知られている構造のものを採用できる。
[1.1.4 Image sensor module]
The image sensor module 4 is arranged on the X direction + side with respect to the lens unit 33. The imaging element module 4 includes an imaging element such as a charge-coupled device (CCD) type image sensor or a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) type image sensor. The image sensor of the image sensor module 4 captures the subject image formed by the lens unit 33 and outputs an electrical signal corresponding to the subject image. A printed wiring board (not shown) is electrically connected to the substrate (not shown) of the imaging element module 4, and the power supplied to the imaging element module 4 and the subject imaged by the imaging element module 4 through the printed wiring board. An image electrical signal is output. Such an image pickup device module 4 can employ a conventionally known structure.
 [1.2 本実施形態の作用・効果について]
 以上のような構成を有する本実施形態のカメラ用アクチュエータおよびカメラモジュール1の場合、プリズムモジュール2に、第一振れ補正装置24の第一アクチュエータ244のみが設けられている。しかも、第一アクチュエータ244は、プリズム23とZ方向(つまり、第一光軸の方向)に重なるようにプリズム23の裏側(つまり、Z方向-側)に配置されている。したがって、プリズム23のX方向の周囲およびY方向の周囲にカメラ用アクチュエータが配置されていない。このため、プリズム23のX方向の周囲およびY方向の周囲における設計の自由度を向上できる。このような設計の自由度の向上は、プリズムモジュール2のX方向およびY方向の小型化に資する。
[1.2 Operation and effect of this embodiment]
In the case of the camera actuator and camera module 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, only the first actuator 244 of the first shake correction device 24 is provided in the prism module 2. In addition, the first actuator 244 is arranged on the back side (that is, the Z direction-side) of the prism 23 so as to overlap the prism 23 in the Z direction (that is, the direction of the first optical axis). Accordingly, camera actuators are not arranged around the prism 23 in the X direction and the Y direction. For this reason, the freedom degree of design in the circumference of the X direction of the prism 23 and the circumference of the Y direction can be improved. Such an improvement in design freedom contributes to the miniaturization of the prism module 2 in the X direction and the Y direction.
 また、レンズモジュール3において、第二振れ補正装置37の駆動装置である一対の第二アクチュエータ370a、370bは、一対のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bに対して、Z方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なった状態で配置されている。このような配置は、レンズモジュール3のX方向およびY方向の小型化に資する。 In the lens module 3, the pair of second actuators 370 a and 370 b that are driving devices of the second shake correction device 37 overlap the pair of AF actuators 364 a and 364 b with a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Arranged in a state. Such an arrangement contributes to miniaturization of the lens module 3 in the X direction and the Y direction.
 また、従来から、例えば、図22に示すような、広角用カメラOC1と望遠用カメラOC2とからなるデュアルカメラを搭載したカメラ搭載装置(図示の場合スマートフォンM)が知られている。このようなスマートフォンMの場合、望遠用カメラOC2のX方向-側(図22Bの左側)に広角用カメラOC1が配置される。具体的には、図1A、4に示す本実施形態のカメラモジュール1を望遠用カメラOC2とした場合に、広角用カメラOC1が、カメラモジュール1よりもX方向-側(図1A、4の左側)に配置される。また、スマートフォンMは、広角用カメラOC1および望遠用カメラOC2を制御する制御部(図示省略)を有する。なお、広角用カメラOC1は、カメラモジュール1よりもY方向+側(図4の表側)に配置される場合もある。 Conventionally, for example, a camera mounting device (smartphone M in the case of illustration) equipped with a dual camera composed of a wide-angle camera OC1 and a telephoto camera OC2 as shown in FIG. 22 is known. In the case of such a smartphone M, the wide-angle camera OC1 is disposed on the X direction-side (left side in FIG. 22B) of the telephoto camera OC2. Specifically, when the camera module 1 of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 1A and 4 is a telephoto camera OC2, the wide-angle camera OC1 is closer to the X direction-side than the camera module 1 (the left side of FIGS. 1A and 4). ). The smartphone M also includes a control unit (not shown) that controls the wide-angle camera OC1 and the telephoto camera OC2. Note that the wide-angle camera OC1 may be arranged closer to the Y direction + side (front side in FIG. 4) than the camera module 1.
 このような構造において、望遠用カメラOC2のカメラ用アクチュエータと、広角カメラOC1のカメラ用アクチュエータとが近いと、いわゆるクロストークが生じることが知られている。このようなクロストークが問題となる配置として、例えば、図1A、4において、望遠用カメラOC2の第一アクチュエータがプリズム23のX方向-側に配置されている場合が挙げられる。 In such a structure, it is known that so-called crosstalk occurs when the camera actuator of the telephoto camera OC2 and the camera actuator of the wide-angle camera OC1 are close to each other. As an arrangement in which such crosstalk becomes a problem, for example, in FIGS. 1A and 4, there is a case where the first actuator of the telephoto camera OC2 is arranged on the X direction minus side of the prism 23.
 これに対して、本実施形態の場合、カメラモジュール1の第一アクチュエータ244を、広角用カメラOC1から遠いプリズム23のZ方向-側に配置している。したがって、上述のデュアルカメラに適用した場合に、本実施形態に係るカメラモジュール1は、広角用カメラOC1のアクチュエータとのクロストークの発生を抑止できる。 In contrast, in the case of the present embodiment, the first actuator 244 of the camera module 1 is disposed on the Z direction-side of the prism 23 far from the wide-angle camera OC1. Therefore, when applied to the above-described dual camera, the camera module 1 according to the present embodiment can suppress the occurrence of crosstalk with the actuator of the wide-angle camera OC1.
 上述のようなスマートフォンMの望遠用カメラOC2として本実施形態のカメラモジュール1を採用すれば、第一アクチュエータ244が、広角用カメラOC1のアクチュエータから遠い位置に配置されるため、広角用カメラOC1とのクロストークを生じにくくできる。 If the camera module 1 of the present embodiment is employed as the telephoto camera OC2 of the smartphone M as described above, the first actuator 244 is disposed at a position far from the actuator of the wide-angle camera OC1, and thus the wide-angle camera OC1 and It is possible to prevent crosstalk.
 [1.3 付記]
 本実施形態では、第二振れ補正装置37の第二アクチュエータ370a、370bがZ方向+側に、AF装置36のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bがZ方向-側に配置されているが、第二振れ補正装置37の第二アクチュエータ370a、370bがZ方向-側に、AF装置36のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bがZ方向+側に配置されてもよい。
[1.3 Notes]
In this embodiment, the second actuators 370a and 370b of the second shake correction device 37 are arranged on the Z direction + side, and the AF actuators 364a and 364b of the AF device 36 are arranged on the Z direction − side. The second actuators 370a and 370b of the device 37 may be disposed on the negative side in the Z direction, and the AF actuators 364a and 364b of the AF device 36 may be disposed on the positive side in the Z direction.
 なお、本実施形態のカメラモジュール1は、上述のプリズムモジュール2とレンズモジュール3とを同時に備えている。ただし、上述のプリズムモジュール2とレンズモジュール3とは、必ずしも同時に実施される必要はない。すなわち、上述のプリズムモジュール2と上述のレンズモジュール3とのうちの一方を備えたカメラモジュールを実施することもできる。さらに、上述のプリズムモジュール2またはレンズモジュール3から一部の構成を取り出して実施してもよい。 Note that the camera module 1 of the present embodiment includes the prism module 2 and the lens module 3 described above at the same time. However, the prism module 2 and the lens module 3 described above are not necessarily performed at the same time. That is, a camera module including one of the prism module 2 and the lens module 3 can be implemented. Further, a part of the configuration may be taken out from the prism module 2 or the lens module 3 described above.
 [2.実施形態2]
 図20、21は、本発明の実施形態2に係るカメラモジュール1aを示す斜視図である。本実施形態のカメラモジュール1aは、プリズムモジュール2aのホルダ241をZ方向-側(つまり、第一ベース22に向かう方向)に押圧する付勢機構の構造が、上述の実施形態1と異なる。その他のカメラモジュール1aの構造は、上述の実施形態1と同様である。このため、以下、本実施形態に係るカメラモジュール1aの構造について、上述の実施形態1と相違する部分の構造を中心に説明する。
[2. Embodiment 2]
20 and 21 are perspective views showing a camera module 1a according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention. The camera module 1a according to the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in the structure of an urging mechanism that presses the holder 241 of the prism module 2a in the Z direction-side (that is, the direction toward the first base 22). Other structures of the camera module 1a are the same as those of the first embodiment. For this reason, hereinafter, the structure of the camera module 1a according to the present embodiment will be described focusing on the structure of the portion different from that of the first embodiment.
 カメラモジュール1aのプリズムモジュール2aは、上述の実施形態1のプリズムモジュール2が有する抑えバネ242(図9A、図9B、図10参照)を有していない。その代わりに、プリズムモジュール2aは、第一ベース22の裏側面(つまり、Z方向-側の面)に固定されたFPC25の裏面に固定された、磁性金属製で矩形環状のヨーク26を有する。なお、ヨーク26の形状は、本実施形態の場合に限定されない。 The prism module 2a of the camera module 1a does not have the holding spring 242 (see FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 10) that the prism module 2 of Embodiment 1 has. Instead, the prism module 2a has a rectangular annular yoke 26 made of magnetic metal and fixed to the back surface of the FPC 25 fixed to the back side surface of the first base 22 (that is, the surface on the Z direction side). The shape of the yoke 26 is not limited to the case of this embodiment.
 本実施形態の場合、ホルダ241の裏側面(つまり、Z方向-側の面)に固定された第一マグネット244aと、ヨーク26との間に生じる互いに引き合う方向の磁力に基づいて、ホルダ241が、第一ベース22に押し付けられる。これにより、ホルダ241は、Z方向における位置決めを図られている。 In the case of the present embodiment, the holder 241 is formed based on the magnetic force in the attracting direction generated between the first magnet 244a fixed to the back side surface of the holder 241 (that is, the Z direction-side surface) and the yoke 26. , Pressed against the first base 22. Thereby, the holder 241 is positioned in the Z direction.
 なお、本実施の形態実施形態の場合、第一アクチュエータ244への通電が切れると、ホルダ241は、第一マグネット244aとヨーク26との間に生じる互いに引き合う方向の磁力に基づいて初期位置に復帰する。その他の構造および作用・効果は上述の実施形態1と同様である。 In the case of the present embodiment, when the first actuator 244 is de-energized, the holder 241 returns to the initial position on the basis of the magnetic force generated between the first magnet 244a and the yoke 26 in the mutually attracting direction. To do. Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
 [3.実施形態3]
 図23~32を参照して、本発明の実施形態3に係るカメラモジュールについて説明する。本実施形態の場合、プリズムモジュール2bの構造が、前述の実施形態1と異なる。具体的には、後述する第一ベース22aに対して、ホルダ241Aを揺動可能に支持する部分の構造が、実施形態1と異なる。
[3. Embodiment 3]
A camera module according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the case of this embodiment, the structure of the prism module 2b is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, the structure of the portion that supports the holder 241A in a swingable manner with respect to a first base 22a described later is different from that of the first embodiment.
 一方、レンズモジュールの構造は、実施形態1と同様である。以下、本実施形態に係るカメラモジュールの構造について、実施形態1と相違する部分の構造を中心に説明する。 On the other hand, the structure of the lens module is the same as that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the structure of the camera module according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the structure of parts different from the first embodiment.
 [3.1 プリズムモジュールについて]
 本実施形態に係るカメラモジュールのプリズムモジュール2bは、第一カバー21、第一ベース22a、プリズム23、および第一振れ補正装置24aを備える。第一カバー21およびプリズム23の構造は、前述の実施形態1と同様である。
[3.1 Prism module]
The prism module 2b of the camera module according to the present embodiment includes a first cover 21, a first base 22a, a prism 23, and a first shake correction device 24a. The structures of the first cover 21 and the prism 23 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
 [第一ベース]
 第一ベース22aは、前述の実施形態1の第一ベース22と同様に、Z方向+側およびX方向+側がそれぞれ開口した箱状部材である。第一ベース22aのZ方向-側の底壁部229には、ベース第一開口部220(図25参照)が形成されている。
[First base]
The first base 22a is a box-like member having an opening on the Z direction + side and the X direction + side, respectively, as in the first base 22 of the first embodiment. A base first opening 220 (see FIG. 25) is formed in the bottom wall portion 229 on the negative side in the Z direction of the first base 22a.
 本実施形態の場合、ベース第一開口部220に、後述する第一アクチュエータ244Aの第一コイル244cおよび第一ホール素子244e、ならびに、後述するスペーサ246が配置されている。 In the case of this embodiment, a first coil 244c and a first hall element 244e of a first actuator 244A described later, and a spacer 246 described later are disposed in the base first opening 220.
 また、第一ベース22aは、後述する第一振れ補正装置24aのホルダ241A(図23、28、29参照)を、Y方向に平行な第一軸を中心とした揺動を可能に支持する。このために、第一ベース22aは、後述する揺動ガイド部材245を保持するための第一受部225cおよび第二受部225d(図26参照)を有する。 Also, the first base 22a supports a holder 241A (see FIGS. 23, 28, and 29) of a first shake correction device 24a, which will be described later, so as to be able to swing around a first axis parallel to the Y direction. For this purpose, the first base 22a has a first receiving portion 225c and a second receiving portion 225d (see FIG. 26) for holding a swing guide member 245 described later.
 第一受部225cは、第一ベース22aにおけるY方向+側の第一側壁部224aに設けられる。一方、第二受部225dは、第一ベース22aにおけるY方向-側の第一側壁部224bに設けられる。 The first receiving part 225c is provided on the first side wall part 224a on the + Y direction side of the first base 22a. On the other hand, the second receiving part 225d is provided on the first side wall part 224b on the Y direction minus side of the first base 22a.
 このような第一受部225cと第二受部225dとは、互いにY方向に対称な形状を有する。具体的には、第一受部225cおよび第二受部225dはそれぞれ、Y方向視でZ方向+側が開口した略V字の切り欠き状である。 The first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d have a shape that is symmetrical with respect to the Y direction. Specifically, each of the first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d has a substantially V-shaped cutout shape that opens in the Z direction + side when viewed in the Y direction.
 また、第一受部225cおよび第二受部225dはそれぞれ、第一ベース22aにおけるY方向中央側がストッパ面225e、225fにより塞がれる。一方、第一受部225cおよび第二受部225dはそれぞれ、第一ベース22aにおけるY方向(幅方向ともいう。)外側が開口する。 Further, the first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d are respectively closed at the center of the first base 22a in the Y direction by the stopper surfaces 225e and 225f. On the other hand, the first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d each open on the outer side in the Y direction (also referred to as the width direction) of the first base 22a.
 第一側壁部224a、224bのZ方向+側の端面にはそれぞれ、第一位置決め凸部226aおよび第二位置決め凸部227a(図26、27参照)が設けられる。第一位置決め凸部226aおよび第二位置決め凸部227aは、後述する一対の揺動支持バネ243(図27、30参照)と係合して、一対の揺動支持バネ243を位置決めする。 A first positioning convex portion 226a and a second positioning convex portion 227a (see FIGS. 26 and 27) are provided on the end surfaces on the Z direction + side of the first side wall portions 224a and 224b, respectively. The first positioning protrusions 226a and the second positioning protrusions 227a engage with a pair of swing support springs 243 (see FIGS. 27 and 30) described later to position the pair of swing support springs 243.
 [第一振れ補正装置]
 第一振れ補正装置24aは、前述した実施形態1と同様に、Y方向に平行な第一軸を中心にプリズム23を揺動させて、当該第一軸を中心とした回転方向の振れ補正を行う。このような第一振れ補正装置24aは、第一収容空間223(図25参照)に配置される。
[First shake correction device]
As in the first embodiment described above, the first shake correction device 24a swings the prism 23 around the first axis parallel to the Y direction, and performs shake correction in the rotational direction around the first axis. Do. Such a first shake correction device 24a is disposed in the first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 25).
 第一振れ補正装置24aは、一対の揺動ガイド部材245、一対の揺動支持バネ243、スペーサ246、ホルダ241A、および第一アクチュエータ244Aを備える。 The first shake correction device 24a includes a pair of swing guide members 245, a pair of swing support springs 243, a spacer 246, a holder 241A, and a first actuator 244A.
 本実施形態の場合も、第一振れ補正装置24aにおいて、ホルダ241Aは、第一ベース22aに揺動可能に支持される。この状態でホルダ241Aは、第一アクチュエータ244Aの駆動力に基づいて第一軸を中心に揺動する。制御部(図示省略)の制御下で第一アクチュエータ244Aが駆動すると、ホルダ241Aおよびプリズム23が第一軸を中心に揺動する。これにより、当該第一軸を中心とした回転方向の振れが補正される。以下、第一振れ補正装置24aが備える各部材の具体的構造について説明する。 Also in the case of the present embodiment, in the first shake correction device 24a, the holder 241A is swingably supported by the first base 22a. In this state, the holder 241A swings around the first axis based on the driving force of the first actuator 244A. When the first actuator 244A is driven under the control of a control unit (not shown), the holder 241A and the prism 23 swing around the first axis. Thereby, the shake in the rotational direction around the first axis is corrected. Hereinafter, a specific structure of each member included in the first shake correction device 24a will be described.
 [揺動ガイド部材]
 一対の揺動ガイド部材245は、それぞれ、たとえば、セラミック製、金属製、合成樹脂製の球体である。一対の揺動ガイド部材245のうちの一方(つまり、Y方向+側)の揺動ガイド部材245は、第一ベース22aの第一受部225cに配置される。一方、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)の揺動ガイド部材245は、第一ベース22aの第二受部225dに配置される。
[Swing guide member]
The pair of swing guide members 245 are, for example, ceramic, metal, and synthetic resin spheres. One of the pair of swing guide members 245 (that is, the Y direction + side) swing guide member 245 is disposed in the first receiving portion 225c of the first base 22a. On the other hand, the other (that is, the Y direction minus side) swing guide member 245 is disposed in the second receiving portion 225d of the first base 22a.
 この状態で、一方の揺動ガイド部材245は第一受部225cに、他方の揺動ガイド部材245は第二受部225dに、それぞれ2個所で当接する。 In this state, one swing guide member 245 contacts the first receiving portion 225c, and the other swing guide member 245 contacts the second receiving portion 225d at two locations.
 また、一対の揺動ガイド部材245のZ方向+側の半部は、揺動ガイド面245a(揺動ガイド部ともいう。)である。揺動ガイド面245aは、第一受部225cおよび第二受部225dよりもZ方向+側に突出する。 Also, the Z direction + side half of the pair of swing guide members 245 is a swing guide surface 245a (also referred to as a swing guide portion). The swing guide surface 245a protrudes in the Z direction + side from the first receiving portion 225c and the second receiving portion 225d.
 また、各揺動ガイド面245aにおけるZ方向+側の端部は、第一側壁部224a、224bのZ方向+側の端面における、第一位置決め凸部226aおよび第二位置決め凸部227a以外の部分よりもZ方向+側に位置している。 Further, the end on the Z direction + side of each swing guide surface 245a is a portion other than the first positioning convex portion 226a and the second positioning convex portion 227a on the end surface on the Z direction + side of the first side wall portions 224a and 224b. It is located on the Z direction + side.
 なお、揺動ガイド部材245は、球体に限らず、たとえば、半球体、円柱、半円柱であってもよい。また、揺動ガイド部材245は、第一ベース22aと一体でもよい。すなわち、揺動ガイド部材は、第一ベース22aの一部により構成されてもよい。 The swing guide member 245 is not limited to a sphere, and may be, for example, a hemisphere, a cylinder, or a half cylinder. Further, the swing guide member 245 may be integrated with the first base 22a. That is, the swing guide member may be configured by a part of the first base 22a.
 [揺動支持バネ]
 一対の揺動支持バネ243は、後述するホルダ241Aを、第一ベース22aに対して揺動可能に支持する。一対の揺動支持バネ243はそれぞれ、金属製の板バネであって、一対の揺動ガイド部材245のZ方向+側に配置される。
[Swing support spring]
The pair of swing support springs 243 support a holder 241A, which will be described later, so as to be swingable with respect to the first base 22a. Each of the pair of swing support springs 243 is a metal leaf spring and is disposed on the Z direction + side of the pair of swing guide members 245.
 以下、一対の揺動支持バネ243のうち一方(つまり、Y方向+側)の揺動支持バネ243について説明する。他方(つまり、Y方向-側)の揺動支持バネ243は、一方の揺動支持バネ243とY方向に対称である。 Hereinafter, one (that is, the Y direction + side) swing support spring 243 of the pair of swing support springs 243 will be described. The other swing support spring 243 (that is, the Y direction minus side) is symmetrical with the other swing support spring 243 in the Y direction.
 一方の揺動支持バネ243は、図30、31に示すように、一対の第一係止部243a、243b、第二係止部243c、捩じれ許容部243g、およびバネ側ガイド面243hを有する。 As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, one swing support spring 243 has a pair of first locking portions 243a and 243b, a second locking portion 243c, a torsion allowing portion 243g, and a spring side guide surface 243h.
 一対の第一係止部243a、243bのうち一方(つまり、X方向+側)の第一係止部243aは、一方の揺動支持バネ243におけるX方向+側の端部に設けられる。このような一方の第一係止部243aは、第一貫通孔243dを有する。 Among the pair of first locking portions 243a and 243b, one (that is, the X direction + side) first locking portion 243a is provided at an end of the one swing support spring 243 on the X direction + side. One such first locking portion 243a has a first through hole 243d.
 一方、他方(つまり、X方向-側)の第一係止部243bは、一方の揺動支持バネ243におけるX方向-側の端部に設けられる。このような他方の第一係止部243bは、第一貫通孔243eを有する。一対の第一係止部243a、243b同士は、X方向に延在した連続部243iにより連続される。 On the other hand, the first locking portion 243b on the other side (that is, the X direction minus side) is provided at the end on the X direction minus side of the one swing support spring 243. The other first locking portion 243b has a first through hole 243e. The pair of first locking portions 243a and 243b are continued by a continuous portion 243i extending in the X direction.
 一対の第一係止部243a、243bのZ方向-側の面は、第一ベース22aの第一側壁部224aにおけるZ方向+側の端面に接着固定される。この状態で、第一貫通孔243d、243eには、それぞれ第一ベース22aの第一位置決め凸部226a、227aが挿通される。 The Z direction-side surfaces of the pair of first locking portions 243a and 243b are bonded and fixed to the Z direction + side end surfaces of the first side wall portion 224a of the first base 22a. In this state, the first positioning protrusions 226a and 227a of the first base 22a are inserted through the first through holes 243d and 243e, respectively.
 なお、他方(Y方向-側)の揺動支持バネ243の場合、一対の第一係止部243a、243bのZ方向-側の面は、第一ベース22aの第一側壁部224bにおけるZ方向+側の端面に接着固定される。 In the case of the other (Y direction minus side) swing support spring 243, the Z direction minus side surfaces of the pair of first locking portions 243a and 243b are in the Z direction on the first side wall portion 224b of the first base 22a. Bonded and fixed to the + side end face.
 第二係止部243cは、第一係止部243a、243b同士のX方向における間部分に、X方向の隙間を介して設けられる。第二係止部243cは、一対の第二貫通孔243fを有する。 The 2nd latching | locking part 243c is provided in the part in the X direction of 1st latching | locking part 243a, 243b via the clearance gap between X directions. The second locking portion 243c has a pair of second through holes 243f.
 第二係止部243cのZ方向+側の面は、後述するホルダ241Aのバネ座面241s(図32参照)に接着固定される。この状態で、一対の第二貫通孔243fにはそれぞれ、ホルダ241Aの一対のホルダ側位置決め凸部241u(図32参照)が挿通される。なお、他方(Y方向-側)の揺動支持バネ243の場合、第二係止部243cのZ方向+側の面は、ホルダ241Aのバネ座面241tに接着固定される。 The surface on the Z direction + side of the second locking portion 243c is bonded and fixed to a spring seat surface 241s (see FIG. 32) of a holder 241A described later. In this state, the pair of holder-side positioning convex portions 241u (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241A are inserted through the pair of second through holes 243f, respectively. In the case of the other (Y direction-side) swing support spring 243, the Z-direction + side surface of the second locking portion 243c is bonded and fixed to the spring seat surface 241t of the holder 241A.
 捩じれ許容部243gは、Y方向に延在した板状部材であって、連続部243iのX方向中間部と、第二係止部243cとを連続する。このような捩じれ許容部243gは、捩じれることにより、第二係止部243cの、各第一係止部243a、243bに対する捩じれを許容する。 The twist allowable portion 243g is a plate-like member extending in the Y direction, and is continuous with the intermediate portion in the X direction of the continuous portion 243i and the second locking portion 243c. Such a twist allowing portion 243g allows the second locking portion 243c to twist with respect to the first locking portions 243a and 243b by being twisted.
 また、捩じれ許容部243gは、弾性変形することにより、各第一係止部243a、243bと第二係止部243cとのZ方向の相対変位を許容する。 Further, the torsion permitting portion 243g allows relative displacement in the Z direction between the first locking portions 243a and 243b and the second locking portion 243c by elastic deformation.
 バネ側ガイド面243hは、第二係止部243cの裏面(つまり、Z方向-側の面)により構成される。このようなバネ側ガイド面243hは、揺動ガイド部材245の揺動ガイド面245aと当接する。 The spring side guide surface 243h is configured by the back surface of the second locking portion 243c (that is, the surface on the Z direction side). Such a spring-side guide surface 243h abuts on the swing guide surface 245a of the swing guide member 245.
 一対の揺動支持バネ243は、自由状態(非組付状態ともいう。)において、全体的に平坦な板状部材である。一方、組付状態において、一対の揺動支持バネ243は、捩じれ許容部243gの弾性変形に基づいて、第二係止部243cが第一係止部243a、243bよりもZ方向+側に位置する(図31参照)。 The pair of swing support springs 243 are plate members that are entirely flat in a free state (also referred to as a non-assembled state). On the other hand, in the assembled state, the pair of swing support springs 243 is configured such that the second locking portion 243c is positioned more on the Z direction + side than the first locking portions 243a and 243b based on the elastic deformation of the torsion allowing portion 243g. (See FIG. 31).
 具体的には、組付状態において、捩じれ許容部243gが、第二係止部243cに向かうほどZ方向+側に向かうように弾性変形する。このような弾性変形に基づいて、一対の揺動支持バネ243のバネ側ガイド面243hは、揺動ガイド部材245をZ方向-側に付勢する。 Specifically, in the assembled state, the torsion allowing portion 243g is elastically deformed so as to be directed toward the Z direction + side toward the second locking portion 243c. Based on such elastic deformation, the spring-side guide surfaces 243h of the pair of swing support springs 243 bias the swing guide member 245 toward the Z direction-side.
 [スペーサ]
 スペーサ246は、第一ベース22aの底壁部229のZ方向-側の面(つまり、底面)に形成された底溝229a(図26、29参照)に配置される。このようなスペーサ246は、第一マグネット244fと第一コイル244cとのZ方向における衝突を防止する。
[Spacer]
The spacer 246 is disposed in a bottom groove 229a (see FIGS. 26 and 29) formed in the Z direction-side surface (that is, the bottom surface) of the bottom wall portion 229 of the first base 22a. Such a spacer 246 prevents the first magnet 244f and the first coil 244c from colliding in the Z direction.
 具体的には、スペーサ246は、板状部材であって、後述する第一アクチュエータ244Aの第一コイル244cを内側に配置可能なスペーサ側貫通孔246aを有する。 Specifically, the spacer 246 is a plate-like member and has a spacer-side through hole 246a in which a first coil 244c of a first actuator 244A to be described later can be disposed.
 スペーサ246の一部は、後述する第一アクチュエータ244Aの第一コイル244cと、ベース第一開口部220(図25、26参照)との間に配置される。 A part of the spacer 246 is disposed between a first coil 244c of the first actuator 244A described later and the base first opening 220 (see FIGS. 25 and 26).
 スペーサ246における第一コイル244cの周囲に配置される部分(衝突防止部ともいう。)のZ方向+側の面(衝突防止面ともいう。)は、第一コイル244cのZ方向+側の面よりも、Z方向+側に位置する(図25参照)。 The Z direction + side surface (also referred to as a collision prevention surface) of the portion (also referred to as a collision prevention portion) arranged around the first coil 244c in the spacer 246 is the surface on the Z direction + side of the first coil 244c. Rather than the Z direction + side (see FIG. 25).
 上記衝突防止面は、後述するホルダ241Aの衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241p(図25、32参照)とZ方向に対向する。 The anti-collision surface is opposed to the anti-collision protrusions 241m, 241n, and 241p (see FIGS. 25 and 32) of the holder 241A described later in the Z direction.
 この状態で、上記衝突防止面と衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241pとの間に存在するZ方向の隙間は、第一アクチュエータ244Aの第一マグネット244fと第一コイル244cとの間に存在するZ方向の隙間よりも小さい。 In this state, a gap in the Z direction that exists between the collision prevention surface and the collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p exists between the first magnet 244f and the first coil 244c of the first actuator 244A. It is smaller than the gap in the Z direction.
 したがって、後述するホルダ241Aとともに第一マグネット244fがZ方向-側に変位した場合でも、第一マグネット244fが第一コイル244cと当接する前に、衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241pがスペーサ246に当接する。これにより、第一マグネット244fと第一コイル244cとの衝突が防止される。なお、スペーサ246は省略されてもよい。図示は省略するが、スペーサ246を省略する場合には、第一ベース22aの底壁部229におけるZ方向+側の面(つまり、表面)の一部(衝突防止面ともいう。)を、第一コイル244cのZ方向+側の面よりも、Z方向+側に位置させる。この場合には、後述するホルダ241Aの衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241p(図25、32参照)の位置を調整し、衝突防止面と衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241pとをZ方向に対向させる。これにより、第一マグネット244fと第一コイル244cとの当接を防止する。 Accordingly, even when the first magnet 244f is displaced in the Z direction − side together with the holder 241A described later, the collision preventing convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are applied to the spacer 246 before the first magnet 244f contacts the first coil 244c. Abut. Thereby, the collision between the first magnet 244f and the first coil 244c is prevented. The spacer 246 may be omitted. Although illustration is omitted, when the spacer 246 is omitted, a part of the surface (that is, the surface) on the Z direction + side of the bottom wall portion 229 of the first base 22a (also referred to as a collision preventing surface) is the first. The coil 244c is positioned closer to the Z direction + side than the Z direction + side surface. In this case, the positions of the collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p (see FIGS. 25 and 32) of the holder 241A described later are adjusted, and the collision prevention surface and the collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are arranged in the Z direction. Make them face each other. Thereby, the contact between the first magnet 244f and the first coil 244c is prevented.
 [ホルダ]
 ホルダ241A(図29、32参照)は、例えば、合成樹脂製であって、第一ベース22aに対してプリズム23を揺動可能な状態で保持する。
[holder]
The holder 241A (see FIGS. 29 and 32) is made of, for example, synthetic resin, and holds the prism 23 in a swingable state with respect to the first base 22a.
 ホルダ241Aは、載置面241a、一対の対向壁部241f、241g、複数の衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241p、および一対の張出し部241q、241rを備える。載置面241aおよび一対の対向壁部241fの構造は、前述した実施形態1のホルダ241の場合とほぼ同様である。 The holder 241A includes a placement surface 241a, a pair of opposing wall portions 241f, 241g, a plurality of collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, 241p, and a pair of overhang portions 241q, 241r. The structure of the mounting surface 241a and the pair of opposing wall portions 241f is substantially the same as that of the holder 241 of the first embodiment.
 複数の衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241pはそれぞれ、ホルダ241Aの裏面(つまり、Z方向-側の面)の複数個所(本実施形態の場合、3個所)に設けられる。なお、衝突防止凸部の位置は、本実施形態の位置に限定されない。 The plurality of collision prevention convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are respectively provided at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the back surface (that is, the surface in the Z direction-side) of the holder 241A. In addition, the position of the collision prevention convex part is not limited to the position of this embodiment.
 衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241pの先端面(つまり、Z方向-側の端面)は、ホルダ241Aの他の部分よりもZ方向-側に位置する。このような衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241pの先端面はそれぞれ、スペーサ246の表面(つまり、Z方向+側の面)とZ方向の隙間を介して対向する。 The tip surfaces (that is, the end surface on the Z direction side) of the collision preventing convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are located on the Z direction side with respect to the other parts of the holder 241A. The front end surfaces of the collision preventing convex portions 241m, 241n, and 241p are opposed to the surface of the spacer 246 (that is, the surface in the Z direction + side) through a gap in the Z direction.
 一対の張出し部241q、241rはそれぞれ、一対の対向壁部241f、241gに設けられる。このような一対の張出し部241q、241rはそれぞれ、ホルダ241Aを、第一ベース22aに対して揺動可能に支持する。 The pair of overhang portions 241q and 241r are provided on the pair of opposing wall portions 241f and 241g, respectively. Each of the pair of overhang portions 241q and 241r supports the holder 241A so as to be swingable with respect to the first base 22a.
 具体的には、一方(つまり、Y方向+側)の張出し部241qは、対向壁部241fのY方向+側面に、当該側面からY方向+側に張り出した状態で設けられている。 Specifically, one (that is, the Y direction + side) overhanging portion 241q is provided on the Y direction + side surface of the opposing wall portion 241f so as to protrude from the side surface to the Y direction + side.
 一方、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)の張出し部241rは、対向壁部241gのY方向-側面に、当該側面からY方向-側に張り出す。 On the other hand, the other (that is, Y direction-side) overhanging portion 241r protrudes from the side surface to the Y direction-side of the opposing wall portion 241g.
 また、一対の張出し部241q、241rはそれぞれ、裏面(つまり、Z方向-側の面)に、平坦面状のバネ座面241s、241tを有する。 The pair of overhang portions 241q and 241r have flat spring-shaped spring seat surfaces 241s and 241t on the back surface (that is, the surface in the Z direction-side), respectively.
 バネ座面241s、241tのX方向に離隔した2箇所には、Z方向-側に突出した一対のホルダ側位置決め凸部241uが形成される。 A pair of holder-side positioning projections 241u protruding in the Z direction-side are formed at two locations spaced apart in the X direction of the spring seat surfaces 241s and 241t.
 バネ座面241s、241tにはそれぞれ、一対の揺動支持バネ243の第二係止部243cのZ方向+側の面が接着固定される。この状態で、一対のホルダ側位置決め凸部241uはそれぞれ、揺動支持バネ243の一対の第二貫通孔243fに挿通される。この構造により、ホルダ241Aは、第一ベース22aに対して揺動可能に支持される。 The surfaces of the second locking portions 243c of the pair of swing support springs 243 are bonded and fixed to the spring seat surfaces 241s and 241t, respectively. In this state, the pair of holder-side positioning protrusions 241u are inserted through the pair of second through holes 243f of the swing support spring 243, respectively. With this structure, the holder 241A is swingably supported with respect to the first base 22a.
 [第一アクチュエータ]
 第一アクチュエータ244Aは、第一軸を中心にホルダ241Aを揺動させる。本実施形態の場合、第一軸とは、一対の揺動ガイド部材245の揺動ガイド面245aと、一対の揺動支持バネ243のバネ側ガイド面243hとの当接部を通るY軸に平行な直線である。
[First actuator]
The first actuator 244A swings the holder 241A about the first axis. In the case of the present embodiment, the first axis is a Y axis that passes through a contact portion between the swing guide surface 245a of the pair of swing guide members 245 and the spring side guide surface 243h of the pair of swing support springs 243. Parallel straight lines.
 第一アクチュエータ244Aは、前述した実施形態1と同様に、プリズム23の光路屈曲面231およびホルダ241AとZ方向(つまり、第一光軸の方向)に重なるようにプリズム23およびホルダ241Aの裏側(つまり、Z方向-側)に配置される。なお、本実施形態の場合も、第一光軸の方向が、第一方向に相当する。 As in the first embodiment, the first actuator 244A is disposed on the back side of the prism 23 and the holder 241A so as to overlap the optical path bending surface 231 of the prism 23 and the holder 241A in the Z direction (that is, the direction of the first optical axis). That is, it is arranged on the Z direction minus side. Note that also in the present embodiment, the direction of the first optical axis corresponds to the first direction.
 本実施形態の場合も、第一アクチュエータ244Aは、第一マグネット244f、第一コイル244c、および第一ホール素子244eを備える。 Also in this embodiment, the first actuator 244A includes the first magnet 244f, the first coil 244c, and the first Hall element 244e.
 第一マグネット244fは、可動側部材であるホルダ241Aの裏側面(つまり、Z方向-側の面)に固定される。本実施形態の場合、第一マグネット244fは、X方向に隣り合う2個のマグネット素子からなる。これら各マグネット素子はそれぞれ、Z方向に着磁され、片側に一つの磁極を有する。各マグネット素子の磁極の向きは、互いに反対である。 The first magnet 244f is fixed to the back side surface of the holder 241A which is a movable side member (that is, the surface on the Z direction side). In the present embodiment, the first magnet 244f is composed of two magnet elements adjacent in the X direction. Each of these magnet elements is magnetized in the Z direction and has one magnetic pole on one side. The direction of the magnetic pole of each magnet element is opposite to each other.
 上述のような第一マグネット244fによれば、第一マグネット244fのX方向中央部分の非着磁部分を、前述の実施形態1のような片側に二つの磁極を有する構造と比べて少なくできる。 According to the first magnet 244f as described above, the non-magnetized portion at the center in the X direction of the first magnet 244f can be reduced as compared with the structure having two magnetic poles on one side as in the first embodiment.
 第一コイル244cおよび第一ホール素子244eは、第一ベース22aの裏側面に固定された、フレキシブルプリント回路基板(以下、FPC)25の表面(つまり、Z方向+側の面)に固定される。 The first coil 244c and the first Hall element 244e are fixed to the surface of the flexible printed circuit board (hereinafter referred to as FPC) 25 (that is, the surface in the Z direction + side) fixed to the back side surface of the first base 22a. .
 第一コイル244cおよび第一ホール素子244eは、第一ベース22aのベース第一開口部220(図25、26参照)に配置される。なお、本実施形態の場合、第一コイル244cは、長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。第一ホール素子244eは、第一コイル244cの径方向の内側に配置される。また、第一コイル244cの外側には、スペーサ246が配置される。 The first coil 244c and the first hall element 244e are disposed in the base first opening 220 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the first base 22a. In the case of the present embodiment, the first coil 244c is a so-called air-core coil having an oval shape. The first hall element 244e is disposed inside the first coil 244c in the radial direction. A spacer 246 is disposed outside the first coil 244c.
 以上のような構成を有する第一アクチュエータ244Aは、前述の実施形態1と同様に、手振れ補正用の制御部(図示省略)の制御下で、ホルダ241Aを第一軸を中心に揺動させる。 The first actuator 244A having the above configuration swings the holder 241A around the first axis under the control of a camera shake correction control unit (not shown), as in the first embodiment.
 以下、図31を参照しつつ、ホルダ241Aが第一軸を中心に揺動する際の動作について説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation when the holder 241A swings around the first axis will be described with reference to FIG.
 第一アクチュエータ244Aは、第一コイル244cに電流が流れると、第一マグネット244fをX方向に変位させるローレンツ力を発生する。第一マグネット244fはホルダ241Aに固定されているため、上記ローレンツ力に基づいてホルダ241Aには、ホルダ241AをX方向(たとえば、図31の矢印Fの方向)に変位させる力が作用する。 When the current flows through the first coil 244c, the first actuator 244A generates a Lorentz force that displaces the first magnet 244f in the X direction. Since the first magnet 244f is fixed to the holder 241A, a force for displacing the holder 241A in the X direction (for example, the direction of arrow F in FIG. 31) acts on the holder 241A based on the Lorentz force.
 ところで、前述のように、ホルダ241Aに固定された一対の揺動支持バネ243の各バネ側ガイド面243hは、一対の揺動ガイド部材245の各揺動ガイド面245aをZ方向-側(図31の矢印Zの方向)に押圧する。 By the way, as described above, the spring-side guide surfaces 243h of the pair of swing support springs 243 fixed to the holder 241A have the swing guide surfaces 245a of the pair of swing guide members 245 in the Z direction minus side (see FIG. 31 is pressed in the direction) of the arrow Z a of.
 上述のような押圧に基づいて、図31の二点鎖線Lのように傾く(つまり、各揺動ガイド面245a上を転がる)。なお、説明の便宜のため、二点鎖線Lの傾斜角度は、実際の各バネ側ガイド面243hの傾斜角度よりも誇張した状態で示される。 Based on press as described above, inclined as chain line L 1 two-dot in FIG. 31 (i.e., roll on the swinging guide surface 245a). Incidentally, for convenience of explanation, the inclination angle of the two-dot chain line L 1 is shown in exaggerated state than the actual inclination angle of each spring guide surfaces 243 h.
 この際、一対の揺動支持バネ243の各捩じれ許容部243gは、各バネ側ガイド面243hの傾きを許容するように捩じれる。上述のように各バネ側ガイド面243hが傾くと、ホルダ241Aは、第一軸を中心に揺動する。 At this time, each torsion allowing portion 243g of the pair of swing support springs 243 is twisted so as to allow the inclination of each spring side guide surface 243h. As described above, when each spring-side guide surface 243h is inclined, the holder 241A swings around the first axis.
 なお、第一コイル244cに流れる電流の向きを制御することにより、ホルダ241Aの変位方向が切り換わる。第一アクチュエータ244Aへの通電が切れると、ホルダ241Aは、一対の揺動支持バネ243の弾性力に基づいて初期位置に復帰する。ホルダ241Aの初期位置とは、ホルダ241Aが揺動していない状態である。その他の構造および作用・効果は前述した実施形態1と同様である。 Note that the direction of displacement of the holder 241A is switched by controlling the direction of the current flowing through the first coil 244c. When the energization of the first actuator 244A is cut off, the holder 241A returns to the initial position based on the elastic force of the pair of swing support springs 243. The initial position of the holder 241A is a state where the holder 241A is not swinging. Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
 [4.実施形態4]
 図33を参照して、本発明の実施形態4に係るカメラモジュールについて説明する。本実施形態の場合、レンズモジュールの構造が、前述した実施形態1と異なる。特に、本実施形態の場合、レンズモジュールを構成する一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、364dおよび一対の第二アクチュエータ370c、370dの構造が、前述の実施形態1と異なる。
[4. Embodiment 4]
A camera module according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of the present embodiment, the structure of the lens module is different from that of the first embodiment. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the structures of the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d and the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d constituting the lens module are different from those of the first embodiment.
 主に、後述する一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、364dにおいて、AF用マグネット365a、365bの構造、AF用ホール素子367aの配置、および、新たにAF用第二マグネット369a、369bを設けた点が、実施形態1と異なる。また、一対の第二アクチュエータ370c、370dにおいて、第二マグネット371c、371dの構造、および、第二ホール素子373の配置が、実施形態1と異なる。 Mainly in a pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d described later, the structure of the AF magnets 365a and 365b, the arrangement of the AF hall element 367a, and the newly provided second AF magnets 369a and 369b are implemented. Different from Form 1. Further, in the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d, the structures of the second magnets 371c and 371d and the arrangement of the second Hall elements 373 are different from those of the first embodiment.
 以下、図33を参照して、一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、364dおよび一対の第二アクチュエータ370c、370dの構造について説明する。なお、図33は、一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、364dおよび一対の第二アクチュエータ370c、370dのみを取り出して示す斜視図である。 Hereinafter, the structure of the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d and the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing only the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d and the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d.
 図示は省略するが、レンズガイドの構造も、前述の実施形態1のレンズガイド361(図11、16参照)と異なる。 Although illustration is omitted, the structure of the lens guide is also different from the lens guide 361 (see FIGS. 11 and 16) of the first embodiment.
 レンズガイドの構造については、一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、364dおよび一対の第二アクチュエータ370c、370dの説明とともに簡単に説明する。一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、364d、一対の第二アクチュエータ370c、370d、およびレンズガイド以外のレンズモジュールの構造については、前述の実施形態1のレンズモジュール3とほぼ同様である。 The structure of the lens guide will be briefly described together with the description of the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d and the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d. The structure of the lens module other than the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d, the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d, and the lens guide is substantially the same as the lens module 3 of the first embodiment.
 なお、プリズムモジュールの構造は、前述の実施形態1~3と同様である。以下、本実施形態に係るカメラモジュールの構造について、実施形態1と異なる部分の構造を中心に説明する。 The structure of the prism module is the same as that of the first to third embodiments. Hereinafter, the structure of the camera module according to the present embodiment will be described focusing on the structure of parts different from the first embodiment.
 [4.1 AFアクチュエータについて]
 一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、364dはそれぞれ、オートフォーカス用となる第三アクチュエータである。一方(つまり、Y方向+側)のAFアクチュエータ364cは、AF用マグネット365a、AF用コイル366a、およびAF用第二マグネット369aを有する。
[4.1 AF actuator]
The pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d are third actuators for autofocus. One (that is, the Y direction + side) AF actuator 364c includes an AF magnet 365a, an AF coil 366a, and an AF second magnet 369a.
 一方、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)のAFアクチュエータ364dは、AF用マグネット365b、AF用コイル366b、AF用ホール素子367a、およびAF用第二マグネット369bを有する。 On the other hand, the other (ie, Y direction-side) AF actuator 364d includes an AF magnet 365b, an AF coil 366b, an AF hall element 367a, and an AF second magnet 369b.
 なお、AF用マグネット365a、365bおよびAF用コイル366a、366bの構造および配置は、前述の実施形態1と同様である。一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、364d同士は、AF用ホール素子367aを除いて、Y方向に対称である。このため、以下、実施形態1と同様の構造についての説明は省略し、他方のAFアクチュエータ364dにおけるAF用ホール素子367aおよびAF用第二マグネット369bの構造および配置についてのみ説明する。 The structure and arrangement of the AF magnets 365a and 365b and the AF coils 366a and 366b are the same as those in the first embodiment. The pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the AF hall element 367a. Therefore, the description of the same structure as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the structure and arrangement of the AF hall element 367a and the AF second magnet 369b in the other AF actuator 364d will be described.
 他方のAFアクチュエータ364dのAF用ホール素子367aには、AF装置用のデバイスドライバが内蔵される。このようなAF用ホール素子367aは、AF用コイル366bの近傍かつAF用コイル366bよりもX方向-側に配置される。 The AF hall element 367a of the other AF actuator 364d incorporates a device driver for the AF apparatus. Such an AF hall element 367a is disposed in the vicinity of the AF coil 366b and closer to the X direction minus side than the AF coil 366b.
 AF用ホール素子367aは、FPC(図示省略)に、はんだにより直接固定される。また、FPC(図示省略)においてAF用ホール素子367aが固定された部分の裏面に、補強プレート(図示省略)が設けられる。なお、AF用ホール素子367aは、FPCに、基板(図示省略)を介して固定されてもよい。この場合には、上記補強プレートは省略されてもよい。 AF Hall element 367a is directly fixed to FPC (not shown) by solder. Further, a reinforcing plate (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the portion where the AF hall element 367a is fixed in the FPC (not shown). The AF hall element 367a may be fixed to the FPC via a substrate (not shown). In this case, the reinforcing plate may be omitted.
 AF用第二マグネット369bは、AF用マグネット365bとは別のマグネットである。具体的には、AF用第二マグネット369bは、着磁方向がZ方向であって、片側に1つの磁極を有する。 The second AF magnet 369b is a magnet different from the AF magnet 365b. Specifically, the second magnet for AF 369b has a magnetization direction in the Z direction and one magnetic pole on one side.
 AF用第二マグネット369bは、AF用マグネット365bの近傍かつX方向-側で、AF用ホール素子367aとZ方向に対面する。このようなAF用第二マグネット369bは、AF用ホール素子367aを通過する磁束密度を高める。なお、AF用第二マグネット369bも、レンズガイド(図示省略)に設けられた保持部に保持される。 The second AF magnet 369b faces the AF hall element 367a in the Z direction in the vicinity of the AF magnet 365b and in the X direction-side. The AF second magnet 369b increases the magnetic flux density that passes through the AF hall element 367a. The second AF magnet 369b is also held by a holding portion provided in a lens guide (not shown).
 [4.2 第二アクチュエータについて]
 一対の第二アクチュエータ370c、370dのうち一方(つまり、Y方向+側)の第二アクチュエータ370cは、一方(つまり、Y方向+側)のAFアクチュエータ364cに対して、Z方向に所定の間隔をあけて対向する。このような一方の第二アクチュエータ370cは、第二マグネット371c、第二コイル372a、および第二ホール素子373を有する。
[4.2 Second actuator]
Of the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d, one (that is, the Y direction + side) second actuator 370c has a predetermined interval in the Z direction with respect to one (that is, the Y direction + side) AF actuator 364c. Open and face each other. One such second actuator 370 c includes a second magnet 371 c, a second coil 372 a, and a second Hall element 373.
 一方、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)の第二アクチュエータ370dは、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)のAFアクチュエータ364dに対して、Z方向に所定の間隔をあけて対向する。このような他方の第二アクチュエータ370dは、第二マグネット371dおよび第二コイル372bを有する。 On the other hand, the other (ie, Y direction-side) second actuator 370d faces the other (ie, Y direction-side) AF actuator 364d at a predetermined interval in the Z direction. The other second actuator 370d has a second magnet 371d and a second coil 372b.
 なお、第二コイル372a、372bの構造および配置は、前述の実施形態1と同様である。一対の第二アクチュエータ370c、370d同士は、第二ホール素子373を除いて、Y方向に対称である。このため、以下、前述の実施形態1と同様の構造については説明を省略し、一方の第二アクチュエータ370cにおける第二マグネット371cおよび第二ホール素子373の構造および配置についてのみ説明する。 The structure and arrangement of the second coils 372a and 372b are the same as those in the first embodiment. The pair of second actuators 370 c and 370 d are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the second Hall element 373. Therefore, the description of the same structure as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the structure and arrangement of the second magnet 371c and the second Hall element 373 in one second actuator 370c will be described below.
 一方の第二アクチュエータ370cにおける第二マグネット371cはそれぞれ、Y方向に隣り合う2個のマグネット素子からなる。各マグネット素子はそれぞれ、X方向に長い直方体であって、Z方向に着磁される。各マグネット素子の磁極の向きは、互いに反対である。第二マグネット371cはそれぞれ、レンズガイド(図示省略)に設けられた保持部に保持される。 Each of the second magnets 371c in one second actuator 370c includes two magnet elements adjacent in the Y direction. Each magnet element is a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the X direction, and is magnetized in the Z direction. The direction of the magnetic pole of each magnet element is opposite to each other. Each of the second magnets 371c is held by a holding portion provided in a lens guide (not shown).
 第二ホール素子373は、第二コイル372aの近傍かつ第二コイル372aよりもZ方向-側に設けられる。第二ホール素子373は、FPC(図示省略)に、はんだにより直接固定される。このような第二ホール素子373の配置態様は、第二コイル372aの大型化を可能とする。大型の第二コイル372aを採用すれば、第二振れ補正装置37の出力は増大する。 The second Hall element 373 is provided near the second coil 372a and closer to the Z direction-side than the second coil 372a. The second Hall element 373 is directly fixed to the FPC (not shown) by solder. Such an arrangement mode of the second Hall element 373 enables the second coil 372a to be enlarged. If the large second coil 372a is employed, the output of the second shake correction device 37 increases.
 [4.3 付記]
 第二マグネット371c、371dとAF用マグネット365a、365bとのZ方向の間部分に、磁性金属製のシールド板6a、6bが設けられる。これにより、一対の第二アクチュエータ370c、370dと、一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、364dとのクロストークが防止される。その他の構造および作用・効果は前述の実施形態1と同様である。
[4.3 Notes]
Magnetic metal shield plates 6a and 6b are provided between the second magnets 371c and 371d and the AF magnets 365a and 365b in the Z direction. Thereby, crosstalk between the pair of second actuators 370c and 370d and the pair of AF actuators 364c and 364d is prevented. Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
 [5.実施形態5]
 図34~36を参照して、本発明の実施形態5に係るカメラモジュールについて説明する。本実施形態の場合、レンズモジュールの構造が、前述した実施形態1と異なる。特に、本実施形態の場合、レンズモジュールを構成する一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364f、一対の第二アクチュエータ370e、370f、およびFPC363Aの構造が、前述した実施形態1と異なる。
[5. Embodiment 5]
A camera module according to Embodiment 5 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the case of the present embodiment, the structure of the lens module is different from that of the first embodiment. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the structures of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f, the pair of second actuators 370e and 370f, and the FPC 363A that constitute the lens module are different from those of the first embodiment.
 主に、一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364fにおいて、AF用マグネット365a、365bの構造および個数、AF用コイル366a、366bの個数、ならびに、AF用ホール素子367aの配置が、実施形態1と異なる。 Mainly, in the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f, the structure and number of AF magnets 365a and 365b, the number of AF coils 366a and 366b, and the arrangement of AF hall elements 367a are different from those of the first embodiment.
 [5.1 AFアクチュエータについて]
 一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364fはそれぞれ、オートフォーカス用となる第三アクチュエータである。一方(つまり、Y方向+側)のAFアクチュエータ364eは、一対のAF用マグネット365a、一対のAF用コイル366a、およびAF用ホール素子367aを有する。
[5.1 About AF actuator]
Each of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is a third actuator for autofocus. One (that is, the Y direction + side) AF actuator 364e includes a pair of AF magnets 365a, a pair of AF coils 366a, and an AF Hall element 367a.
 一方、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)のAFアクチュエータ364fは、一対のAF用マグネット365b、一対のAF用コイル366bを有する。 On the other hand, the other (ie, Y direction-side) AF actuator 364f includes a pair of AF magnets 365b and a pair of AF coils 366b.
 なお、一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364f同士は、AF用ホール素子367aを除いて、Y方向に対称である。このため、以下、一方のAFアクチュエータ364eの構造および配置についてのみ説明する。 The pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the AF hall element 367a. Therefore, only the structure and arrangement of one AF actuator 364e will be described below.
 一方のAFアクチュエータ364eにおいて、一対のAF用マグネット365aは、X方向に離れた状態で隣り合う。なお、一対のAF用マグネット365aはそれぞれ、片側に一つの磁極を有する2個のマグネット素子を組み合わせた構造でもよい。あるいは、一対のAF用マグネット365aはそれぞれ、片側に二つの磁極を有する構造であってもよい。このような一対のAF用マグネット365aはそれぞれ、レンズガイド(図示省略)の保持部に保持される。 In one AF actuator 364e, the pair of AF magnets 365a are adjacent to each other in a state separated in the X direction. Each of the pair of AF magnets 365a may have a structure in which two magnet elements having one magnetic pole on one side are combined. Alternatively, each of the pair of AF magnets 365a may have a structure having two magnetic poles on one side. Each of such a pair of AF magnets 365a is held by a holding portion of a lens guide (not shown).
 一対のAF用コイル366aは、X方向に離れた状態で隣り合う。このような一対のAF用コイル366aはそれぞれ、一対のAF用マグネット365aのZ方向-側に配置される。この状態で、一対のAF用コイル366aはそれぞれ、一対のAF用マグネット365aと所定の間隔をあけてZ方向に対向する。 The pair of AF coils 366a are adjacent to each other while being separated in the X direction. The pair of AF coils 366a is disposed on the Z direction minus side of the pair of AF magnets 365a. In this state, the pair of AF coils 366a are opposed to the pair of AF magnets 365a in the Z direction at a predetermined interval.
 具体的には、一対のAF用コイル366aはそれぞれ、長円形状のいわゆる空心コイルである。一対のAF用コイル366aはそれぞれ、長軸がY方向に一致した状態で、FPC363Aの第一コイル固定部363aに直接固定される。 Specifically, each of the pair of AF coils 366a is an oval so-called air-core coil. Each of the pair of AF coils 366a is directly fixed to the first coil fixing portion 363a of the FPC 363A with the long axis aligned with the Y direction.
 なお、FPC363Aにおける第一コイル固定部363aの裏面に、第一補強プレート391aが設けられる。また、FPC363Aにおいて、他方のAFアクチュエータ364fの一対のAF用コイル366aが固定される第一コイル固定部363bの裏面には、第一補強プレート391bが設けられる。さらに、第一補強プレート391aの裏面に、非磁性体からなる第二補強プレート392aが設けられる。また、第一補強プレート391bの裏面に非磁性体からなる第二補強プレート392bが設けられる。なお、第二補強プレート392a、392bはそれぞれ、磁性体であってもよい。磁性体の第二補強プレート392a、392bはそれぞれ、AF用コイル366a、366bを通過する磁束密度の向上に寄与する。 In addition, the 1st reinforcement plate 391a is provided in the back surface of the 1st coil fixing | fixed part 363a in FPC363A. In the FPC 363A, a first reinforcing plate 391b is provided on the back surface of the first coil fixing portion 363b to which the pair of AF coils 366a of the other AF actuator 364f is fixed. Further, a second reinforcing plate 392a made of a nonmagnetic material is provided on the back surface of the first reinforcing plate 391a. A second reinforcing plate 392b made of a nonmagnetic material is provided on the back surface of the first reinforcing plate 391b. The second reinforcing plates 392a and 392b may each be a magnetic material. The magnetic second reinforcing plates 392a and 392b contribute to the improvement of the magnetic flux density that passes through the AF coils 366a and 366b, respectively.
 AF用ホール素子367aは、AF装置用のデバイスドライバが内蔵されている。このようなAF用ホール素子367aは、一対のAF用コイル366a同士の間に配置される。このようなAF用ホール素子367aは、FPC363Aにおける第一コイル固定部363aの表面に、はんだにより直接固定される。 The AF hall element 367a incorporates a device driver for the AF apparatus. Such an AF Hall element 367a is disposed between the pair of AF coils 366a. Such an AF Hall element 367a is directly fixed to the surface of the first coil fixing portion 363a of the FPC 363A by solder.
 なお、一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364fは、前述の実施形態4の一対のAFアクチュエータ364c、370dに置き換えてもよい。 Note that the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f may be replaced with the pair of AF actuators 364c and 370d of the fourth embodiment described above.
 [5.2 第二アクチュエータについて]
 一対の第二アクチュエータ370e、370fのうち一方(つまり、Y方向+側)の第二アクチュエータ370eは、一方のAFアクチュエータ364eに対して、Z方向に所定の間隔をあけて対向する。このような第二アクチュエータ370eは、第二マグネット371c、第二コイル372a、および第二ホール素子373を有する。
[5.2 About the second actuator]
One (that is, the Y direction + side) second actuator 370e of the pair of second actuators 370e and 370f opposes one AF actuator 364e with a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Such a second actuator 370e has a second magnet 371c, a second coil 372a, and a second Hall element 373.
 一方、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)の第二アクチュエータ370fは、第二マグネット371dおよび第二コイル372bを有する。 On the other hand, the second actuator 370f on the other side (that is, the Y direction minus side) has a second magnet 371d and a second coil 372b.
 なお、第二マグネット371c、371d、第二コイル372a、372b、および第二ホール素子373の構造は、前述の実施形態4と同様である。ただし、本実施形態の場合、これら各部材の配置態様が、前述の実施形態4と異なる。 The structures of the second magnets 371c and 371d, the second coils 372a and 372b, and the second Hall element 373 are the same as those in the fourth embodiment. However, in the case of this embodiment, the arrangement of these members is different from that of the above-described fourth embodiment.
 また、一対の第二アクチュエータ370e、370f同士は、第二ホール素子373を除いて、Y方向に対称である。このため、以下、前述の実施形態4と同様の部分についての説明は省略し、一方の第二アクチュエータ370eにおいて、前述の実施形態4と異なる部分を説明する。 The pair of second actuators 370e and 370f are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the second Hall element 373. Therefore, the description of the same parts as those of the above-described fourth embodiment will be omitted, and parts of the second actuator 370e different from those of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described.
 一方の第二アクチュエータ370eの第二コイル372aは、第二マグネット371cよりもZ方向+側に設けられる。第二コイル372aは、FPC363Aの第二コイル固定部363fの裏面に固定される。 The second coil 372a of one of the second actuators 370e is provided closer to the Z direction + side than the second magnet 371c. The second coil 372a is fixed to the back surface of the second coil fixing portion 363f of the FPC 363A.
 また、FPC363Aにおいて、第二コイル固定部363fの表面には、第一補強プレート391cが設けられる。なお、FPC363Aにおいて、他方の第二アクチュエータ370fの第二コイル372bが固定される第二コイル固定部363gの表面には、第一補強プレート391dが設けられる。さらに、第一補強プレート391cの表面に、非磁性体からなる第二補強プレート392cが設けられる。また、第一補強プレート391dの表面に非磁性体からなる第二補強プレート392dが設けられる。なお、第二補強プレート392c、392dはそれぞれ、磁性体であってもよい。磁性体の第二補強プレート392c、392dはそれぞれ、第二コイル372a、372bを通過する磁束密度の向上に寄与する。 Further, in the FPC 363A, a first reinforcing plate 391c is provided on the surface of the second coil fixing portion 363f. In the FPC 363A, a first reinforcing plate 391d is provided on the surface of the second coil fixing portion 363g to which the second coil 372b of the other second actuator 370f is fixed. Further, a second reinforcing plate 392c made of a nonmagnetic material is provided on the surface of the first reinforcing plate 391c. A second reinforcing plate 392d made of a nonmagnetic material is provided on the surface of the first reinforcing plate 391d. The second reinforcing plates 392c and 392d may each be a magnetic body. The magnetic second reinforcing plates 392c and 392d contribute to the improvement of the magnetic flux density passing through the second coils 372a and 372b, respectively.
 第二ホール素子373は、第二コイル372aの近傍かつ第二コイル372aよりもX方向+側に設けられる。 The second Hall element 373 is provided in the vicinity of the second coil 372a and closer to the + X direction than the second coil 372a.
 [5.3 付記]
 また、第二マグネット371cとAF用マグネット365aとの間、および、第二マグネット371dとAF用マグネット365bとのZ方向の間部分のそれぞれ、磁性金属製の1対のシールド板6a、6bが配置される。これにより、一対の第二アクチュエータ370e、370fと、一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364fとのクロストークが防止される。その他の構造および作用・効果は前述の実施形態1と同様である。
[5.3 Notes]
A pair of shield plates 6a and 6b made of magnetic metal are disposed between the second magnet 371c and the AF magnet 365a and between the second magnet 371d and the AF magnet 365b in the Z direction. Is done. Thereby, crosstalk between the pair of second actuators 370e and 370f and the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is prevented. Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
 [6.実施形態6]
 図37を参照して、本発明の実施形態6に係るカメラモジュールについて説明する。本実施形態の場合、一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364fの構造は、AF用ホール素子367aの位置を、一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364fとの間で入れ替えた点を除いて、前述の実施形態5とほぼ同様である。このため、一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364fについての、詳しい説明は省略する。
[6. Embodiment 6]
A camera module according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of this embodiment, the structure of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is the same as that of Embodiment 5 described above except that the position of the AF hall element 367a is exchanged between the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f. It is almost the same. Therefore, detailed description of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is omitted.
 [6.1 第二アクチュエータについて]
 一対の第二アクチュエータ370g、370hのうち一方(つまり、Y方向+側)の第二アクチュエータ370gは、第二マグネット371a、第二コイル372a、および第三マグネット374aを有する。
[6.1 About the second actuator]
One of the pair of second actuators 370g and 370h (that is, the Y direction + side) second actuator 370g includes a second magnet 371a, a second coil 372a, and a third magnet 374a.
 一方、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)の第二アクチュエータ370hは、第二マグネット371b、第二コイル372b、第二ホール素子373、および第三マグネット374bを有する。 On the other hand, the second actuator 370h on the other side (that is, the Y direction minus side) includes a second magnet 371b, a second coil 372b, a second Hall element 373, and a third magnet 374b.
 第二マグネット371a、371bおよび第二コイル372a、372bの構造および配置は、前述の実施形態1と同様である。一対の第二アクチュエータ370g、370h同士は、第二ホール素子373を除いて、Y方向に対称である。このため、以下、前述の実施形態1と同様の部分についての説明は省略し、他方の第二アクチュエータ370hにおける第二ホール素子373および第三マグネット374bの構造および配置についてのみ説明する。 The structure and arrangement of the second magnets 371a and 371b and the second coils 372a and 372b are the same as those in the first embodiment. The pair of second actuators 370g and 370h are symmetrical in the Y direction except for the second Hall element 373. For this reason, the description of the same parts as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the structure and arrangement of the second Hall element 373 and the third magnet 374b in the other second actuator 370h will be described below.
 なお、第二マグネット371a、371bは、片側に一つの磁極を有する2個のマグネット素子を組み合わせた構造でもよい。あるいは、第二マグネット371a、371bは、片側に二つの磁極を有する構造であってもよい。 The second magnets 371a and 371b may have a structure in which two magnet elements having one magnetic pole on one side are combined. Alternatively, the second magnets 371a and 371b may have a structure having two magnetic poles on one side.
 他方の第二アクチュエータ370hの第二ホール素子373は、第二コイル372bよりもZ方向-側かつX方向-側に配置される。このような第二ホール素子373は、FPC(図示省略)に固定される。 The second Hall element 373 of the other second actuator 370h is disposed closer to the Z direction-side and the X direction-side than the second coil 372b. Such a second Hall element 373 is fixed to an FPC (not shown).
 他方の第二アクチュエータ370hの第三マグネット374bは、第二マグネット371aとは別のマグネットである。具体的には、第三マグネット374bは、着磁方向がY方向であって、片側に一つの磁極を有する。このような第三マグネット374bは、第二ホール素子373よりもZ方向-側に配置され、かつ、第二ホール素子373とZ方向に対向する。第三マグネット374bは、レンズガイド(図示省略)に設けられた保持部に保持される。 The third magnet 374b of the other second actuator 370h is a magnet different from the second magnet 371a. Specifically, the third magnet 374b is magnetized in the Y direction and has one magnetic pole on one side. Such a third magnet 374 b is arranged on the Z direction − side of the second Hall element 373 and is opposed to the second Hall element 373 in the Z direction. The third magnet 374b is held by a holding portion provided in a lens guide (not shown).
 [6.2 付記]
 本実施形態の場合、第二マグネット371a、371bのZ方向+側に隣接する位置に、磁性金属製のシールド板(ヨークともいう。)6a、6bが配置される。このようなシールド板6a、6bは、第二マグネット371a、371bのヨークとして機能する。その他の構造および作用・効果は前述の実施形態1と同様である。
[6.2 Notes]
In the case of this embodiment, magnetic metal shield plates (also called yokes) 6a and 6b are arranged at positions adjacent to the Z direction + side of the second magnets 371a and 371b. Such shield plates 6a and 6b function as yokes of the second magnets 371a and 371b. Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
 [7.実施形態7]
 図38、39を参照して、本発明の実施形態7に係るカメラモジュールについて説明する。本実施形態の場合、一対のAFアクチュエータ364e、364fの構造は、前述の実施形態5とほぼ同様である。
[7. Embodiment 7]
The camera module according to Embodiment 7 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the case of this embodiment, the structure of the pair of AF actuators 364e and 364f is substantially the same as that of the fifth embodiment.
 [7.1 第二アクチュエータについて]
 一対の第二アクチュエータ370i、370jのうちY方向+側の第二アクチュエータ370iは、一対の第二マグネット371a、第二コイル372a、および第二ホール素子373を有する。本実施形態の場合、前述の実施形態1の構造と比べて、第二マグネット371aが一つ増えている。なお、これら各部材の構造は、実施形態1と同様である。
[7.1 About the second actuator]
Of the pair of second actuators 370i and 370j, the second actuator 370i on the Y direction + side includes a pair of second magnets 371a, a second coil 372a, and a second Hall element 373. In the case of the present embodiment, the second magnet 371a is increased by one compared to the structure of the first embodiment. The structures of these members are the same as those in the first embodiment.
 一対の第二マグネット371aおよび後述する一対の第二マグネット371bはそれぞれ、片側に一つの磁極を有する2個のマグネット素子を組み合わせた構造でもよい。あるいは、一対の第二マグネット371aおよび一対の第二マグネット371bはそれぞれ、片側に二つの磁極を有する構造であってもよい。 Each of the pair of second magnets 371a and a pair of second magnets 371b described later may have a structure in which two magnet elements having one magnetic pole on one side are combined. Alternatively, each of the pair of second magnets 371a and the pair of second magnets 371b may have a structure having two magnetic poles on one side.
 このような一対の第二マグネット371aは、所定の間隔をあけて第二コイル372aをZ方向から挟むように配置される。一方(つまり、Z方向+側)の第二マグネット371aは、レンズガイド361Aの一方の第二マグネット保持部368aに保持される。一方、Z方向-側の第二マグネット371aは、レンズガイド361Aの一方の第三マグネット保持部368cに保持される。 Such a pair of second magnets 371a are arranged so as to sandwich the second coil 372a from the Z direction at a predetermined interval. One (that is, the Z direction + side) second magnet 371a is held by one second magnet holding portion 368a of the lens guide 361A. On the other hand, the second magnet 371a on the negative side in the Z direction is held by one third magnet holding portion 368c of the lens guide 361A.
 一方、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)の第二アクチュエータ370jは、一対の第二マグネット371bおよび第二コイル372bを有する。他方の第二アクチュエータ370jにおいても、前述の実施形態1の構造と比べて、第二マグネット371bが一つ増えている。なお、これら各部材の構造は、実施形態1と同様である。 On the other hand, the second actuator 370j on the other side (that is, the Y direction-side) has a pair of second magnets 371b and a second coil 372b. Also in the other second actuator 370j, the second magnet 371b is increased by one as compared with the structure of the first embodiment. The structures of these members are the same as those in the first embodiment.
 このような一対の第二マグネット371bは、所定の間隔をあけて第二コイル372bをZ方向から挟むように配置される。一方(つまり、Z方向+側)の第二マグネット371bは、レンズガイド361Aの他方の第二マグネット保持部(図示省略)に保持される。一方、他方(つまり、Z方向-側)の第二マグネット371bは、レンズガイド361の他方の第三マグネット保持部(図示省略)に保持される。 Such a pair of second magnets 371b are arranged so as to sandwich the second coil 372b from the Z direction at a predetermined interval. One (that is, the Z direction + side) second magnet 371b is held by the other second magnet holding portion (not shown) of the lens guide 361A. On the other hand, the second magnet 371b on the other side (that is, the Z direction minus side) is held by the other third magnet holding portion (not shown) of the lens guide 361.
 以上のような本実施形態の場合、一対の第二アクチュエータ370i、370jにおいて、それぞれ一対の第二マグネット371a、371bを設けているため、第二振れ補正装置37(図5参照)の出力を増大できる。その他の構造および作用・効果は前述の実施形態1と同様である。 In the case of this embodiment as described above, since the pair of second magnets 371a and 371b are provided in the pair of second actuators 370i and 370j, respectively, the output of the second shake correction device 37 (see FIG. 5) is increased. it can. Other structures, operations and effects are the same as those of the first embodiment.
 [8 実施形態8]
 図40~52を参照して、本発明の実施形態8に係るカメラモジュールについて説明する。本実施形態の場合、プリズムモジュール2cおよびレンズモジュール3aの構造が、前述の実施形態1および実施形態3と異なる。以下、本実施形態に係るカメラモジュールの構造について、実施形態1および実施形態3と異なる部分を中心に説明する。
[8 Embodiment 8]
A camera module according to Embodiment 8 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the case of this embodiment, the structures of the prism module 2c and the lens module 3a are different from those of the first and third embodiments. Hereinafter, the structure of the camera module according to the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first and third embodiments.
 [8.1 プリズムモジュールについて]
 本実施形態に係るカメラモジュールのプリズムモジュール2cは、第一カバー21(図1A参照)、第一ベース22b、プリズム23、および第一振れ補正装置24b(図40および図41参照)を備える。第一カバー21およびプリズム23の構造は、前述の実施形態1と同様である。
[8.1 Prism module]
The prism module 2c of the camera module according to the present embodiment includes a first cover 21 (see FIG. 1A), a first base 22b, a prism 23, and a first shake correction device 24b (see FIGS. 40 and 41). The structures of the first cover 21 and the prism 23 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
 [第一ベース]
 第一ベース22bは、前述した実施形態1の第一ベース22と同様に、Z方向+側およびX方向+側がそれぞれ開口した箱状部材である。第一ベース22bは、Z方向-側の底壁部229bに、ベース第一開口部220(図43参照)を有する。
[First base]
The first base 22b is a box-shaped member that opens in the Z direction + side and the X direction + side, respectively, as in the first base 22 of the first embodiment. The first base 22b has a base first opening 220 (see FIG. 43) in the bottom wall portion 229b on the Z-direction side.
 本実施形態の場合、ベース第一開口部220に、第一アクチュエータ244Aの第一コイル244cおよび第一ホール素子244eが配置される。 In the case of the present embodiment, the first coil 244c and the first Hall element 244e of the first actuator 244A are disposed in the base first opening 220.
 第一ベース22bは、第一振れ補正装置24bのホルダ241B(図40参照)を、Y方向に平行な第一軸を中心とした揺動を可能に支持する。このために、第一ベース22bは、前述の実施形態3と同様に、揺動ガイド部材245を保持するための第一受部225c1および第二受部225d1(図44参照)を有する。 The first base 22b supports the holder 241B (see FIG. 40) of the first shake correction device 24b so that the holder 241B can swing around a first axis parallel to the Y direction. For this purpose, the first base 22b has a first receiving portion 225c1 and a second receiving portion 225d1 (see FIG. 44) for holding the swing guide member 245, as in the third embodiment.
 第一受部225c1は、第一ベース22bにおけるY方向+側の第一側壁部224a1に設けられる。一方、第二受部225d1は、第一ベース22bにおけるY方向-側の第一側壁部224b1に設けられる。 The 1st receiving part 225c1 is provided in the 1st side wall part 224a1 of the Y direction + side in the 1st base 22b. On the other hand, the second receiving portion 225d1 is provided on the first side wall portion 224b1 on the Y direction minus side of the first base 22b.
 このような第一受部225c1と第二受部225d1とは、互いにY方向に対称な形状を有する。具体的には、第一受部225c1および第二受部225d1はそれぞれ、第一側壁部224a1および第一側壁部224b1のZ方向+側の端面(上面)にのみ開口する円柱状の凹部である。 The first receiving part 225c1 and the second receiving part 225d1 have a shape symmetrical to each other in the Y direction. Specifically, the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1 are cylindrical recesses that open only on the end surface (upper surface) on the Z direction + side of the first side wall portion 224a1 and the first side wall portion 224b1, respectively. .
 第一側壁部224a1は、上面のY方向内端縁と第一受部225c1との間に第一堰部224c1(図44参照)を有する。一方、第一側壁部224b1は、上面のY方向内端縁と第二受部225d1との間に第一堰部224c2(図44参照)を有する。第一堰部224c1および第一堰部224c2はそれぞれ、第一受部225c1および第二受部225d1に、揺動ガイド部材245(図43参照)を固定する接着剤の、Y方向中央側への流出防止に寄与する。 The first side wall portion 224a1 includes a first dam portion 224c1 (see FIG. 44) between the Y direction inner end edge of the upper surface and the first receiving portion 225c1. On the other hand, the first side wall portion 224b1 includes a first dam portion 224c2 (see FIG. 44) between the Y direction inner end edge of the upper surface and the second receiving portion 225d1. The first dam portion 224c1 and the first dam portion 224c2 are respectively provided with an adhesive that fixes the swing guide member 245 (see FIG. 43) to the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1 toward the center in the Y direction. Contributes to spill prevention.
 第一側壁部224a1は、上面における第一受部225c1のY方向外側半部の一部を囲む部分に第二堰部224d1(図44参照)を有する。一方、第一側壁部224b1は、上面における第二受部225d1のY方向外側半部の一部を囲む部分に第二堰部224d2を有する。第二堰部224d1および第二堰部224d2はそれぞれ、第一受部225c1および第二受部225d1に、揺動ガイド部材245を固定する接着剤の、Y方向外側への流出防止に寄与する。 The first side wall portion 224a1 has a second dam portion 224d1 (see FIG. 44) at a portion surrounding a part of the outer half of the first receiving portion 225c1 on the upper side in the Y direction. On the other hand, the first side wall portion 224b1 has a second dam portion 224d2 at a portion surrounding a part of the outer half of the second receiving portion 225d1 on the upper surface in the Y direction. The second dam portion 224d1 and the second dam portion 224d2 contribute to preventing the adhesive that fixes the swing guide member 245 to the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1, respectively, from flowing out to the outside in the Y direction.
 第一側壁部224a1は、上面における第二堰部224d1よりもY方向外側部分に、バネ配置空間224e1、224e2(図44参照)を有する。本実施形態の場合、バネ配置空間224e1とバネ配置空間224e2とは、X方向に離隔する。 The first side wall portion 224a1 has spring arrangement spaces 224e1 and 224e2 (see FIG. 44) on the outer side in the Y direction from the second dam portion 224d1 on the upper surface. In the present embodiment, the spring arrangement space 224e1 and the spring arrangement space 224e2 are separated in the X direction.
 一方、第一側壁部224b1は、上面における第二堰部224d2よりもY方向外側部分に、バネ配置空間224f1、224f2(図44参照)を有する。バネ配置空間224f1とバネ配置空間224f2とは、X方向に離隔する。バネ配置空間224e1、224e2およびバネ配置空間224f1、224f2にはそれぞれ、後述する揺動支持バネ243A(図45参照)の連続部243i1の一部(具体的には基端側連続部243j1)が配置される。 On the other hand, the first side wall portion 224b1 has spring arrangement spaces 224f1 and 224f2 (see FIG. 44) in the Y direction outer side portion than the second dam portion 224d2 on the upper surface. The spring arrangement space 224f1 and the spring arrangement space 224f2 are separated from each other in the X direction. In the spring arrangement spaces 224e1 and 224e2 and the spring arrangement spaces 224f1 and 224f2, a part of the continuous portion 243i1 (specifically, the base end side continuous portion 243j1) of the swing support spring 243A (see FIG. 45) described later is arranged. Is done.
 第一側壁部224a1は、上面における第二堰部224d1よりもY方向外側部分に、X方向+側から順に3個の凸部224g1、224g2、224g3を有する。凸部224g1と凸部224g3とは、X方向に離隔し、かつ、X方向からの平面視で重なる。凸部224g2は、凸部224g1および凸部224g3よりもY方向外側(図44の下側)に位置する。 The first side wall portion 224a1 has three convex portions 224g1, 224g2, and 224g3 in order from the X direction + side on the outer side of the second dam portion 224d1 on the upper surface in the Y direction. The convex part 224g1 and the convex part 224g3 are separated in the X direction and overlap in plan view from the X direction. The convex part 224g2 is located outside the convex part 224g1 and the convex part 224g3 in the Y direction (the lower side in FIG. 44).
 バネ配置空間224e1は、凸部224g1と凸部224g2との間に存在する空間である。一方、バネ配置空間224e2は、凸部224g2と凸部224g3との間に存在する空間である。 The spring arrangement space 224e1 is a space existing between the convex portion 224g1 and the convex portion 224g2. On the other hand, the spring arrangement space 224e2 is a space that exists between the convex portion 224g2 and the convex portion 224g3.
 第一側壁部224b1は、上面における第二堰部224d2よりもY方向外側部分に、X方向+側から順に3個の凸部224h1、224h2、224h3を有する。凸部224h1と凸部224h3とは、X方向に離隔し、かつ、Y方向からの平面視で重なる。凸部224h2は、凸部224h1および凸部224h3よりもY方向外側(図44の上側)に位置する。 The first side wall portion 224b1 has three convex portions 224h1, 224h2, and 224h3 in order from the X direction + side on the outer side of the second dam portion 224d2 on the upper surface in the Y direction. The convex portion 224h1 and the convex portion 224h3 are separated in the X direction and overlap in plan view from the Y direction. The convex part 224h2 is located on the outer side in the Y direction (upper side in FIG. 44) than the convex part 224h1 and the convex part 224h3.
 バネ配置空間224f1は、凸部224h1と凸部224h2との間に存在する空間である。一方、バネ配置空間224f2は、凸部224h2と凸部224h3との間に存在する空間である。 The spring arrangement space 224f1 is a space that exists between the convex portion 224h1 and the convex portion 224h2. On the other hand, the spring arrangement space 224f2 is a space that exists between the convex portion 224h2 and the convex portion 224h3.
 第一側壁部224a1、224b1はそれぞれ、上面におけるX方向両端部に、第一位置決め凸部226a1および第二位置決め凸部227a1(図44参照)を有する。第一位置決め凸部226a1および第二位置決め凸部227a1はそれぞれ、後述する一対の揺動支持バネ243A(図45参照)と係合して、一対の揺動支持バネ243Aを位置決めする。 Each of the first side wall portions 224a1 and 224b1 has a first positioning convex portion 226a1 and a second positioning convex portion 227a1 (see FIG. 44) at both ends in the X direction on the upper surface. Each of the first positioning convex portion 226a1 and the second positioning convex portion 227a1 engages with a pair of swing support springs 243A (see FIG. 45) described later to position the pair of swing support springs 243A.
 [第一振れ補正装置]
 第一振れ補正装置24bは、前述した実施形態1および実施形態3と同様に、Y方向に平行な第一軸を中心にプリズム23を揺動させて、当該第一軸を中心とした回転方向の振れ補正を行う。このような第一振れ補正装置24bは、第一収容空間223(図6参照)に配置される。
[First shake correction device]
As in the first and third embodiments described above, the first shake correction device 24b swings the prism 23 about the first axis parallel to the Y direction, and rotates around the first axis. Perform shake correction. Such a first shake correction device 24b is disposed in the first accommodation space 223 (see FIG. 6).
 第一振れ補正装置24bは、一対の揺動ガイド部材245(図43参照)、一対の揺動支持バネ243A、ホルダ241B(図42参照)、および第一アクチュエータ244A(図43参照)を備える。 The first shake correction device 24b includes a pair of swing guide members 245 (see FIG. 43), a pair of swing support springs 243A, a holder 241B (see FIG. 42), and a first actuator 244A (see FIG. 43).
 本実施形態の場合も、第一振れ補正装置24bにおいて、ホルダ241Bは、第一ベース22bに揺動可能に支持される。この状態でホルダ241Bは、第一アクチュエータ244Aの駆動力に基づいて第一軸を中心に揺動する。制御部(図示省略)の制御下で第一アクチュエータ244Aが駆動すると、ホルダ241Bおよびプリズム23が第一軸を中心に揺動する。これにより、当該第一軸を中心とした回転方向の振れが補正される。以下、第一振れ補正装置24bが備える各部材の具体的構造について説明する。 Also in the case of the present embodiment, in the first shake correction device 24b, the holder 241B is swingably supported by the first base 22b. In this state, the holder 241B swings around the first axis based on the driving force of the first actuator 244A. When the first actuator 244A is driven under the control of a control unit (not shown), the holder 241B and the prism 23 swing around the first axis. Thereby, the shake in the rotational direction around the first axis is corrected. Hereinafter, a specific structure of each member included in the first shake correction device 24b will be described.
 [揺動ガイド部材]
 一対の揺動ガイド部材245はそれぞれ、たとえば、セラミック製、金属製、合成樹脂製の球体である。一対の揺動ガイド部材245のうちの一方(つまり、Y方向+側)の揺動ガイド部材245は、第一ベース22bの第一受部225c1(図44参照)に配置される。一方、他方(つまり、Y方向-側)の揺動ガイド部材245は、第一ベース22bの第二受部225d1に配置される。
[Swing guide member]
Each of the pair of swing guide members 245 is, for example, a sphere made of ceramic, metal, or synthetic resin. One of the pair of swing guide members 245 (that is, the Y direction + side) swing guide member 245 is disposed in the first receiving portion 225c1 (see FIG. 44) of the first base 22b. On the other hand, the other (that is, the Y direction minus side) swing guide member 245 is disposed in the second receiving portion 225d1 of the first base 22b.
 一対の揺動ガイド部材245はそれぞれ、第一受部225c1および第二受部225d1に接着剤により固定される。この状態において、一対の揺動ガイド部材245のZ方向+側の半部は、揺動ガイド面245a(揺動ガイド部ともいう。図23参照)である。揺動ガイド面245aは、第一受部225c1および第二受部225d1よりもZ方向+側に突出する。 The pair of swing guide members 245 are respectively fixed to the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1 with an adhesive. In this state, the Z direction + side half of the pair of swing guide members 245 is a swing guide surface 245a (also referred to as a swing guide portion; see FIG. 23). The swing guide surface 245a protrudes more in the Z direction + side than the first receiving portion 225c1 and the second receiving portion 225d1.
 また、各揺動ガイド面245aにおけるZ方向+側の端部は、第一側壁部224a1、224b1のZ方向+側の端面における、第一位置決め凸部226a1および第二位置決め凸部227a1以外の部分よりもZ方向+側に位置する(図31参照)。なお、揺動ガイド部材245は、球体に限らず、たとえば、半球体、円柱、半円柱であってもよい。また、揺動ガイド部材245は、第一ベース22bと一体でもよい。すなわち、揺動ガイド部材は、第一ベース22bの一部により構成されてもよい。 Further, the end on the Z direction + side of each swing guide surface 245a is a portion other than the first positioning convex portion 226a1 and the second positioning convex portion 227a1 on the Z direction + side end surface of the first side wall portions 224a1 and 224b1. It is located on the Z direction + side than (see FIG. 31). The swing guide member 245 is not limited to a sphere, and may be, for example, a hemisphere, a cylinder, or a semi-cylinder. Further, the swing guide member 245 may be integrated with the first base 22b. That is, the swing guide member may be configured by a part of the first base 22b.
 [揺動支持バネ]
 一対の揺動支持バネ243Aは、後述するホルダ241Bを、第一ベース22bに対して揺動可能に支持する。一対の揺動支持バネ243Aはそれぞれ、金属製の板バネであって、一対の揺動ガイド部材245のZ方向+側に配置される。
[Swing support spring]
The pair of swing support springs 243A support a holder 241B described later so as to be swingable with respect to the first base 22b. Each of the pair of swing support springs 243A is a metal leaf spring, and is disposed on the Z direction + side of the pair of swing guide members 245.
 以下、一対の揺動支持バネ243Aのうち一方(つまり、Y方向+側)の揺動支持バネ243Aについて、図45を参照して説明する。他方(つまり、Y方向-側)の揺動支持バネ243Aは、一方の揺動支持バネ243AとY方向に対称である。 Hereinafter, one (that is, the Y direction + side) swing support spring 243A of the pair of swing support springs 243A will be described with reference to FIG. The other swing support spring 243A (that is, the Y direction minus side) is symmetrical with the other swing support spring 243A in the Y direction.
 一方の揺動支持バネ243Aは、一対の第一係止部243a1、243b1、第二係止部243c1、捩じれ許容部243g1、およびバネ側ガイド面243h1を有する。 One swing support spring 243A has a pair of first locking portions 243a1, 243b1, a second locking portion 243c1, a torsion allowing portion 243g1, and a spring side guide surface 243h1.
 一対の第一係止部243a1、243b1のうち一方(つまり、X方向+側)の第一係止部243a1は、一方の揺動支持バネ243AにおけるX方向+側の端部に配置される。このような一方の第一係止部243a1は、第一貫通孔243d1を有する。 Among the pair of first locking portions 243a1 and 243b1, one (that is, the X direction + side) first locking portion 243a1 is disposed at an end on the X direction + side of one swing support spring 243A. One such first locking portion 243a1 has a first through hole 243d1.
 一方、他方(つまり、X方向-側)の第一係止部243b1は、一方の揺動支持バネ243AにおけるX方向-側の端部に配置される。このような他方の第一係止部243b1は、第一貫通孔243e1を有する。一対の第一係止部243a1、243b1同士は、X方向に延在した連続部243i1により連続される。 On the other hand, the first locking portion 243b1 on the other side (that is, the X direction minus side) is disposed at the end on the X direction minus side of the one swing support spring 243A. The other first locking portion 243b1 has a first through hole 243e1. The pair of first locking portions 243a1 and 243b1 are continued by a continuous portion 243i1 extending in the X direction.
 連続部243i1は、後述する捩じれ許容部243g1よりもX方向+側に配置された連続部要素243j、および、捩じれ許容部243g1よりもX方向-側に配置された連続部要素243kを有する。連続部要素243jは、捩じれ許容部243g1と第一係止部243a1とを連続する。一方、連続部要素243kは、捩じれ許容部243g1と第一係止部243b1とを連続する。 The continuous portion 243i1 has a continuous portion element 243j disposed on the X direction + side with respect to a twist allowing portion 243g1 to be described later, and a continuous portion element 243k disposed on the X direction-side with respect to the twist allowing portion 243g1. The continuous portion element 243j continues the twist allowing portion 243g1 and the first locking portion 243a1. On the other hand, the continuous portion element 243k continues the twist allowing portion 243g1 and the first locking portion 243b1.
 以下、連続部要素243jについて説明する。連続部要素243jは、基端側連続部243j1および蛇行連続部243j2を有する。基端側連続部243j1と蛇行連続部243j2とは、連続する。 Hereinafter, the continuous part element 243j will be described. The continuous portion element 243j has a proximal side continuous portion 243j1 and a meandering continuous portion 243j2. The proximal end side continuous portion 243j1 and the meandering continuous portion 243j2 are continuous.
 基端側連続部243j1は、連続部要素243jにおいて、捩じれ許容部243g1に近い側の端部に設けられる。基端側連続部243j1の一端(捩じれ許容部243g1に近い側の端部)は、捩じれ許容部243g1に連続する。蛇行連続部243j2は、略S字状である。 The base end side continuous portion 243j1 is provided at the end portion of the continuous portion element 243j on the side close to the twist allowable portion 243g1. One end of the base end side continuous portion 243j1 (the end portion on the side close to the twist allowable portion 243g1) is continuous with the twist allowable portion 243g1. The meandering continuous portion 243j2 is substantially S-shaped.
 蛇行連続部243j2の一端(捩じれ許容部243g1に近い側の端部)は、基端側連続部243j1に連続する。蛇行連続部243j2の他端(捩じれ許容部243g1から遠い側の端部)は、第一係止部243a1に連続する。連続部要素243kは、連続部要素243jとX方向に対称である。このため、連続部要素243kについては、連続部要素243jの構成部材と同一符号を付して、説明を省略する。 One end of the meandering continuous portion 243j2 (the end portion on the side close to the twist allowing portion 243g1) is continuous with the proximal-side continuous portion 243j1. The other end of the meandering continuous portion 243j2 (the end portion far from the twist allowing portion 243g1) is continuous with the first locking portion 243a1. The continuous element 243k is symmetrical to the continuous element 243j in the X direction. For this reason, about the continuous part element 243k, the same code | symbol as the structural member of the continuous part element 243j is attached | subjected, and description is abbreviate | omitted.
 一対の第一係止部243a1、243b1のZ方向-側の面は、第一ベース22bの第一側壁部224a1におけるZ方向+側の端面に接着固定される。この状態で、第一貫通孔243d1、243e1には、それぞれ第一ベース22bの第一位置決め凸部226a1、227a1が挿通される(図43参照)。 The Z-direction-side surfaces of the pair of first locking portions 243a1, 243b1 are bonded and fixed to the Z-direction + -side end surfaces of the first side wall portion 224a1 of the first base 22b. In this state, the first positioning protrusions 226a1 and 227a1 of the first base 22b are inserted into the first through holes 243d1 and 243e1, respectively (see FIG. 43).
 なお、他方(Y方向-側)の揺動支持バネ243Aの場合、一対の第一係止部243a1、243b1のZ方向-側の面は、第一ベース22bの第一側壁部224b1におけるZ方向+側の端面に接着固定される。 In the case of the other (Y direction minus side) swing support spring 243A, the Z direction minus side surfaces of the pair of first locking portions 243a1 and 243b1 are in the Z direction on the first side wall portion 224b1 of the first base 22b. Bonded and fixed to the + side end face.
 第二係止部243c1は、第一係止部243a1、243b1同士のX方向における間部分に、X方向の隙間を介して設けられる。第二係止部243c1は、一対の第二貫通孔243f1を有する。 The second locking portion 243c1 is provided at a portion in the X direction between the first locking portions 243a1 and 243b1 via a gap in the X direction. The second locking portion 243c1 has a pair of second through holes 243f1.
 第二係止部243c1のZ方向+側の面は、後述するホルダ241Bのバネ座面241s(図32参照)に接着固定される。この状態で、一対の第二貫通孔243f1にはそれぞれ、ホルダ241Bの一対のホルダ側位置決め凸部241u(図32参照)が挿通される。なお、他方(Y方向-側)の揺動支持バネ243Aの場合、第二係止部243c1のZ方向+側の面は、ホルダ241Bのバネ座面241t(図32参照)に接着固定される。 The surface on the Z direction + side of the second locking portion 243c1 is bonded and fixed to a spring seat surface 241s (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241B described later. In this state, the pair of holder-side positioning protrusions 241u (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241B are inserted into the pair of second through holes 243f1, respectively. In the case of the other (Y direction-side) swing support spring 243A, the surface on the Z direction + side of the second locking portion 243c1 is adhesively fixed to the spring seat surface 241t (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241B. .
 捩じれ許容部243g1は、Y方向に延在した板状部材であって、連続部243i1のX方向中間部(具体的には、各基端側連続部243j1の一端)と、第二係止部243c1とを連続する。このような捩じれ許容部243g1は、捩じれることにより、第二係止部243c1の、第一係止部243a1、243b1に対する捩じれを許容する。 The torsion allowing portion 243g1 is a plate-like member extending in the Y direction, and is an intermediate portion in the X direction of the continuous portion 243i1 (specifically, one end of each base end side continuous portion 243j1) and the second locking portion. 243c1 is continued. Such a twist allowing portion 243g1 allows the second locking portion 243c1 to be twisted with respect to the first locking portions 243a1 and 243b1 by being twisted.
 また、捩じれ許容部243g1は、弾性変形することにより、各第一係止部243a1、243b1と第二係止部243c1とのZ方向の相対変位を許容する。 Further, the torsion allowing portion 243g1 allows relative displacement in the Z direction between the first locking portions 243a1, 243b1 and the second locking portion 243c1 by elastic deformation.
 バネ側ガイド面243h1は、第二係止部243c1の裏面(つまり、Z方向-側の面)により構成される。このようなバネ側ガイド面243h1は、揺動ガイド部材245の揺動ガイド面245a(図31参照)と当接する。 The spring side guide surface 243h1 is configured by the back surface of the second locking portion 243c1 (that is, the surface on the Z direction side). Such a spring-side guide surface 243h1 contacts the swing guide surface 245a (see FIG. 31) of the swing guide member 245.
 一対の揺動支持バネ243Aは、自由状態(非組付状態ともいう。)において、全体的に平坦な板状部材である。一方、組付状態において、一対の揺動支持バネ243Aは、捩じれ許容部243g1の弾性変形に基づいて、第二係止部243c1が第一係止部243a1、243b1よりもZ方向+側に位置する(図31参照)。 The pair of swing support springs 243A are plate members that are entirely flat in a free state (also referred to as a non-assembled state). On the other hand, in the assembled state, the pair of swing support springs 243A has the second locking portion 243c1 positioned closer to the Z direction + side than the first locking portions 243a1, 243b1 based on the elastic deformation of the torsion allowing portion 243g1. (See FIG. 31).
 具体的には、組付状態において、捩じれ許容部243g1が、第二係止部243c1に向かうほどZ方向+側に向かうように弾性変形する。このような弾性変形に基づいて、一対の揺動支持バネ243Aのバネ側ガイド面243h1は、揺動ガイド部材245をZ方向-側に付勢する。 Specifically, in the assembled state, the torsion allowing portion 243g1 is elastically deformed so as to be directed toward the Z direction + side toward the second locking portion 243c1. Based on such elastic deformation, the spring-side guide surfaces 243h1 of the pair of swing support springs 243A bias the swing guide member 245 in the Z direction minus side.
 以上のような一対の揺動支持バネ243Aの組付状態において、バネ配置空間224e1、224e2およびバネ配置空間224f1、224f2にはそれぞれ、一対の揺動支持バネ243Aの基端側連続部243j1が配置される。さらに、バネ配置空間224e1、224e2およびバネ配置空間224f1、224f2には、基端側連続部243j1を覆うようにゲル状の制震部材27が配置される(図43参照)。 In the assembled state of the pair of swing support springs 243A as described above, the base end side continuous portions 243j1 of the pair of swing support springs 243A are disposed in the spring placement spaces 224e1, 224e2 and the spring placement spaces 224f1, 224f2, respectively. Is done. Further, a gel-like damping member 27 is arranged in the spring arrangement spaces 224e1 and 224e2 and the spring arrangement spaces 224f1 and 224f2 so as to cover the proximal end side continuous portion 243j1 (see FIG. 43).
 制震部材27は、一対の揺動支持バネ243Aの不要共振の抑制に効果的である。不要共振を抑制する観点から、制震部材27は、一対の揺動支持バネ243Aにおいて使用時に最も大きく変形する部分の近くに設けるのが好ましい。本実施形態の場合、使用時に最も大きく変形する部分は捩じれ許容部243g1である。このため、制震部材27は、一対の揺動支持バネ243Aにおける捩じれ許容部243g1に近い部分を覆うのが好ましい。 The vibration control member 27 is effective in suppressing unnecessary resonance of the pair of swing support springs 243A. From the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessary resonance, it is preferable that the vibration control member 27 is provided near a portion of the pair of swing support springs 243A that is most deformed during use. In the case of the present embodiment, the portion that deforms the most during use is the twist allowing portion 243g1. For this reason, it is preferable that the vibration control member 27 covers a portion of the pair of swing support springs 243A that is close to the twist allowable portion 243g1.
 [ホルダ]
 ホルダ241B(図40参照)は、例えば、合成樹脂製であって、第一ベース22bに対してプリズム23を揺動可能な状態で保持する。ホルダ241Bの基本的な構成は、前述の実施形態3のホルダ241A(図32参照)とほぼ同様である。以下、ホルダ241Bについて、実施形態3のホルダ241Aと異なる構成を説明する。
[holder]
The holder 241B (see FIG. 40) is made of, for example, synthetic resin, and holds the prism 23 in a swingable state with respect to the first base 22b. The basic configuration of the holder 241B is substantially the same as the holder 241A (see FIG. 32) of the third embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the holder 241B will be described with a configuration different from the holder 241A of the third embodiment.
 ホルダ241Bの張出し部241q1、241r1は、一対の対向壁部241f、241g(図32参照)からのY方向への突出量が、実施形態3のホルダ241Aの張出し部241q、241r(図32参照)よりも小さい。したがって、組付状態において、ホルダ241BのY方向における両端面(つまり、張出し部241q1、241r1のY方向における外側の端面)の位置は、第一ベース22bのY方向における両端面よりも、Y方向中央側に位置する。このような構成は、ホルダ241Bの小型・軽量化に寄与する。 The protruding portions 241q1 and 241r1 of the holder 241B protrude from the pair of opposing wall portions 241f and 241g (see FIG. 32) in the Y direction, and the protruding portions 241q and 241r (see FIG. 32) of the holder 241A of the third embodiment. Smaller than. Therefore, in the assembled state, the positions of both end faces in the Y direction of the holder 241B (that is, the end faces on the outer side in the Y direction of the overhang portions 241q1 and 241r1) are in the Y direction rather than both end faces in the Y direction of the first base 22b. Located on the center side. Such a configuration contributes to reducing the size and weight of the holder 241B.
 また、本実施形態の場合、実施形態3のスペーサ246(図25参照)が省略されているため、ホルダ241Bの裏面(つまり、Z方向-側の面)には、衝突防止凸部241m、241n、241p(図32参照)が設けられていない。その他のホルダ241Bの構造は、前述した実施形態1のホルダ241または実施形態3のホルダ241Aとほぼ同様である。 In the present embodiment, since the spacer 246 (see FIG. 25) of the third embodiment is omitted, the collision prevention convex portions 241m and 241n are formed on the back surface of the holder 241B (that is, the Z direction-side surface). , 241p (see FIG. 32) are not provided. The structure of the other holder 241B is substantially the same as the holder 241 of the first embodiment or the holder 241A of the third embodiment.
 [第一アクチュエータ]
 第一アクチュエータ244Aは、第一軸を中心にホルダ241Bを揺動させる。本実施形態の場合、第一軸とは、一対の揺動ガイド部材245の揺動ガイド面245aと、一対の揺動支持バネ243Aのバネ側ガイド面243h1との当接部を通るY軸に平行な直線である。なお、第一アクチュエータ244Aの構造は、前述した実施形態3と同様である。このような第一アクチュエータ244Aは、前述の実施形態3と同様に、手振れ補正用の制御部(図示省略)の制御下で、ホルダ241Bを、第一軸を中心に揺動させる。ホルダ241Bが第一軸を中心に揺動する際の動作については、図31を参照して説明した前述した実施形態3の場合と同様である。
[First actuator]
The first actuator 244A swings the holder 241B around the first axis. In the case of the present embodiment, the first axis is a Y axis that passes through a contact portion between the swing guide surface 245a of the pair of swing guide members 245 and the spring side guide surface 243h1 of the pair of swing support springs 243A. Parallel straight lines. The structure of the first actuator 244A is the same as that of the third embodiment described above. Such a first actuator 244A swings the holder 241B around the first axis under the control of a camera shake correction control unit (not shown), as in the third embodiment. The operation when the holder 241B swings around the first axis is the same as that in the third embodiment described above with reference to FIG.
 次に、本実施形態に係るカメラモジュールのレンズモジュール3aについて説明する。レンズモジュール3aの基本的構成は、前述した実施形態1のレンズモジュール3とほぼ同様である。以下、レンズモジュール3aについて、実施形態1のレンズモジュール3と異なる部分を中心に説明する。 Next, the lens module 3a of the camera module according to this embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the lens module 3a is substantially the same as the lens module 3 of the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the lens module 3a will be described with a focus on differences from the lens module 3 of the first embodiment.
 [8.2 レンズモジュールについて]
 レンズモジュール3aは、図46~52に示すように、第二カバー31(図1A参照)、第二ベース32A、レンズ部33、AF装置36A、第二振れ補正装置37A、および基準部材38を備える。第二カバー31、レンズ部33、および基準部材38は、前述した実施形態1と同様である。
[8.2 Lens module]
46 to 52, the lens module 3a includes a second cover 31 (see FIG. 1A), a second base 32A, a lens unit 33, an AF device 36A, a second shake correction device 37A, and a reference member 38. . The second cover 31, the lens unit 33, and the reference member 38 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
 [第二ベース]
 第二ベース32A(図46および図47参照)は、上述の第二カバー31と組み合わされることにより、レンズ部33、AF装置36A、および第二振れ補正装置37Aを配置可能な第二収容空間320(図4参照)を形成する。
[Second base]
The second base 32A (see FIGS. 46 and 47) is combined with the second cover 31 described above, so that the second accommodation space 320 in which the lens unit 33, the AF device 36A, and the second shake correction device 37A can be disposed. (See FIG. 4).
 第二ベース32Aの基本的構成は、前述した実施形態1の第二ベース32とほぼ同様である。このため、以下、第二ベース32Aについて、実施形態1の第二ベース32と異なる部分を中心に説明する。 The basic configuration of the second base 32A is substantially the same as the second base 32 of the first embodiment described above. For this reason, hereinafter, the second base 32A will be described focusing on portions different from the second base 32 of the first embodiment.
 第二ベース32Aの第二側壁部322a1は、Y方向+側の側面におけるX方向両端部に、スプリング配置部324a1、324c1(図46参照)を有する。スプリング配置部324a1およびスプリング配置部324c1にはそれぞれ、後述するスプリング362a1およびスプリング362c1が配置される。 The second side wall portion 322a1 of the second base 32A has spring placement portions 324a1 and 324c1 (see FIG. 46) at both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the Y direction + side. A spring 362a1 and a spring 362c1, which will be described later, are arranged in the spring arrangement part 324a1 and the spring arrangement part 324c1, respectively.
 第二ベース32Aの第二側壁部322a1は、Y方向+側の側面に、スリット322i(図46参照)を有する。スリット322iは、後述するFPC363B(図50参照)の第一連続部363iを配置可能な空間を有する。当該空間は、ZY平面に平行な空間である。スリット322iは、Y方向+側およびZ方向両側に開口する。 The second side wall portion 322a1 of the second base 32A has a slit 322i (see FIG. 46) on the side surface on the Y direction + side. The slit 322i has a space in which a first continuous portion 363i of an FPC 363B (see FIG. 50) described later can be disposed. The space is a space parallel to the ZY plane. The slits 322i open on the Y direction + side and the Z direction both sides.
 一方、第二ベース32Aの第二側壁部322b1は、Y方向-側の側面におけるX方向両端部に、スプリング配置部324b1、324d1(図47参照)を有する。スプリング配置部324b1およびスプリング配置部324d1にはそれぞれ、後述するスプリング362b1およびスプリング362d1が配置される。 On the other hand, the second side wall portion 322b1 of the second base 32A has spring arrangement portions 324b1 and 324d1 (see FIG. 47) at both ends in the X direction on the side surface on the Y direction side. A spring 362b1 and a spring 362d1, which will be described later, are arranged in the spring arrangement part 324b1 and the spring arrangement part 324d1, respectively.
 第二ベース32Aの第二側壁部322b1は、Y方向-側の側面に、一対の凹部322jを有する。凹部322jにはそれぞれ、後述するFPC363Bの一対の第二連続部363jが配置される。なお、凹部322jの構成は、図示の場合に限定されない。 The second side wall portion 322b1 of the second base 32A has a pair of concave portions 322j on the side surface on the Y direction side. A pair of second continuous portions 363j of an FPC 363B, which will be described later, is disposed in each of the recesses 322j. In addition, the structure of the recessed part 322j is not limited to the case of illustration.
 スプリング配置部324a1~324d1はそれぞれ、ゲル配置部324e~324hを有する。本実施形態の場合、スプリング配置部324a1~324d1はそれぞれ、Z方向+側の端部にゲル配置部324e~324hを有する。ゲル配置部324e~324hはそれぞれ、スプリング362a1~362d1の一部を覆ったゲル状の制震部材325a~325dを保持可能に構成される。 The spring placement portions 324a1 to 324d1 have gel placement portions 324e to 324h, respectively. In the case of this embodiment, the spring placement portions 324a1 to 324d1 have gel placement portions 324e to 324h at end portions on the Z direction + side, respectively. Each of the gel placement portions 324e to 324h is configured to be able to hold gel-like vibration control members 325a to 325d that cover portions of the springs 362a1 to 362d1.
 [レンズ部]
 レンズ部33は、後述するレンズガイド361Bに保持された状態で、第二収容空間320に配置される。このようなレンズ部33は、筒状のレンズバレル、および、レンズバレルに保持された1以上のレンズを有する。一例として、レンズ部33は、レンズバレルのX方向-側の端部とレンズバレルのX方向+側の端部との間に固定された、たとえば光学3倍以上の望遠レンズ群を有する。なお、レンズ部33の構造は、上述の構造に限定されない。
[Lens part]
The lens unit 33 is disposed in the second accommodation space 320 while being held by a lens guide 361B described later. Such a lens part 33 has a cylindrical lens barrel and one or more lenses held in the lens barrel. As an example, the lens unit 33 includes a telephoto lens group having, for example, an optical triplex or more, which is fixed between the X-direction end of the lens barrel and the X-direction end of the lens barrel. In addition, the structure of the lens part 33 is not limited to the above-mentioned structure.
 [AF装置]
 AF装置36A(図48および図49参照)は、オートフォーカスを目的として、レンズ部33をX方向に変位させる。具体的には、AF装置36Aは、レンズガイド361B、複数個(本実施形態の場合4個)のスプリング362a1~362d1、FPC363B、および一対のAFアクチュエータ364a1、364b1を有する。
[AF device]
The AF device 36A (see FIGS. 48 and 49) displaces the lens unit 33 in the X direction for the purpose of autofocus. Specifically, the AF device 36A includes a lens guide 361B, a plurality (four in this embodiment) of springs 362a1 to 362d1, an FPC 363B, and a pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1.
 [レンズガイド]
 レンズガイド361B(図46~図48参照)は、レンズバレルを保持可能な収容空間を有する。このようなレンズガイド361Bは、X方向(つまり、第二光軸の方向)およびY方向の変位を可能な状態で、上述の第二収容空間320に配置されている。
[Lens guide]
The lens guide 361B (see FIGS. 46 to 48) has a housing space capable of holding the lens barrel. Such a lens guide 361B is arranged in the above-described second accommodation space 320 in a state where displacement in the X direction (that is, the direction of the second optical axis) and the Y direction is possible.
 レンズガイド361Bは、後述する一対のAFアクチュエータ364a1、364b1のAF用マグネット365a1、365b1を保持する一対の第一マグネット保持部361a1、361b1(図48および図49参照)を有する。本実施形態の場合、一対の第一マグネット保持部361a1、361b1はそれぞれ、第二ベース32Aのマグネット用空間322g、322h(図11参照)に配置される。なお、図48は、一部の部材を省略した状態のレンズモジュール3aを、Y方向+側から見た側面図である。一方、図49は、一部の部材を省略した状態のレンズモジュール3aを、Y方向-側から見た側面図である。 The lens guide 361B has a pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) for holding AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 of a pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1 described later. In the case of this embodiment, the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 are respectively disposed in the magnet spaces 322g and 322h (see FIG. 11) of the second base 32A. 48 is a side view of the lens module 3a with some members omitted, as viewed from the Y direction + side. On the other hand, FIG. 49 is a side view of the lens module 3a with some members omitted, as viewed from the Y direction-side.
 本実施形態の場合、Y方向からの平面視(図48および図49に示す状態)で、一対の第一マグネット保持部361a1、361b1の形状が、前述した実施形態1の場合と異なる。具体的には、一対の第一マグネット保持部361a1、361b1はそれぞれ、Y方向からの平面視で、Z方向-側が開口した凹部である。このような一対の第一マグネット保持部361a1、361b1はそれぞれ、AF用マグネット365a1、365b1を保持した状態において、AF用マグネット365a1、365b1の面取部365c1、365c2と対面する傾斜面部361e1、361e2を有する。 In the case of the present embodiment, the shape of the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 is different from that of the first embodiment described above in a plan view from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 48 and 49). Specifically, each of the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 is a recess that is open on the Z direction minus side in a plan view from the Y direction. The pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 has inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 facing the chamfered portions 365c1 and 365c2 of the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1, respectively, in a state where the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 are held. Have.
 具体的には、一対の第一マグネット保持部361a1、361b1はそれぞれ、X方向に離隔し、かつ、X方向に対面した一対の側面部361c1、361c2を有する。一対の第一マグネット保持部361a1、361b1はそれぞれ、一対の側面部361c1、361c2のZ方向+側の端部同士を、X方向に連続する上面部361dを有する。 Specifically, the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 have a pair of side surface portions 361c1 and 361c2 that are separated in the X direction and face each other in the X direction. Each of the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 has an upper surface portion 361d in which the end portions on the Z direction + side of the pair of side surface portions 361c1 and 361c2 are continuous in the X direction.
 また、一対の側面部361c1、361c2はそれぞれ、Z方向-側の端部に、上述の傾斜面部361e1、361e2を有する。傾斜面部361e1、361e2は、AF用マグネット365a1、365b1の面取部365c1、365c2に沿う傾斜面である。 The pair of side surface portions 361c1 and 361c2 have the inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 described above at the end in the Z direction-side. The inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 are inclined surfaces along the chamfered portions 365c1 and 365c2 of the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1.
 具体的には、傾斜面部361e1および傾斜面部361e2は、Z方向-側(図48および図49の下側)に向かうほど、X方向における互いの距離が短くなる方向に傾斜する。すなわち、傾斜面部361e1と傾斜面部361e2との間のX方向における距離は、Z方向-側の端部において最も小さい。このような傾斜面部361e1、361e2は、組付状態において、AF用マグネット365a1、365b1のZ方向-側の抜け止めに寄与する。 Specifically, the inclined surface portion 361e1 and the inclined surface portion 361e2 are inclined in the direction in which the mutual distance in the X direction becomes shorter toward the Z direction-side (lower side in FIGS. 48 and 49). That is, the distance in the X direction between the inclined surface portion 361e1 and the inclined surface portion 361e2 is the smallest at the end on the negative side in the Z direction. Such inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 contribute to preventing the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 from coming off in the Z direction − side in the assembled state.
 レンズガイド361Bは、後述する一対の第二アクチュエータ370a1、370b1の第二マグネット371a1、371b1を保持する一対の第二マグネット保持部368a1、368b1(図48および図49参照)を有する。本実施形態の場合、一対の第二マグネット保持部368a1、368b1はそれぞれ、第二ベース32A(図46および図47参照)のコイル載置部322d、322eとZ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なる。 The lens guide 361B has a pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1, 368b1 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) for holding second magnets 371a1, 371b1 of a pair of second actuators 370a1, 370b1, which will be described later. In the case of the present embodiment, the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1, 368b1 respectively overlap with the coil placement portions 322d, 322e of the second base 32A (see FIGS. 46 and 47) at a predetermined interval in the Z direction. .
 本実施形態の場合、Y方向からの平面視(図48および図49に示す状態)で、一対の第二マグネット保持部368a1、368b1の形状が、前述した実施形態1の場合と異なる。具体的には、一対の第二マグネット保持部368a1、368b1はそれぞれ、Y方向からの平面視で、Z方向-側が開口した凹部である。このような一対の第二マグネット保持部368a1、368b1はそれぞれ、第二マグネット371a1、371b1を保持した状態において、第二マグネット371a1、371b1の面取部371e1、371e2と対面する傾斜面部368f1、368f2を有する。 In the case of this embodiment, the shape of the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1 and 368b1 is different from that of the first embodiment described above in a plan view from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 48 and 49). Specifically, each of the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1 and 368b1 is a recess that is open on the Z direction minus side in a plan view from the Y direction. The pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1 and 368b1 respectively have inclined surface portions 368f1 and 368f2 facing the chamfered portions 371e1 and 371e2 of the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 in a state where the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 are held. Have.
 具体的には、一対の第二マグネット保持部368a1、368b1はそれぞれ、X方向に離隔し、かつ、X方向に対面した一対の側面部368d1、368d2を有する。一対の第二マグネット保持部368a1、368b1はそれぞれ、一対の側面部368d1、368d2のZ方向+側の端部同士をX方向に連続する上面部368eを有する。 Specifically, the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1 and 368b1 have a pair of side surface portions 368d1 and 368d2 that are separated in the X direction and face each other in the X direction. Each of the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1, 368b1 has an upper surface portion 368e in which ends on the Z direction + side of the pair of side surface portions 368d1, 368d2 are continuous in the X direction.
 また、一対の側面部368d1、368d2はそれぞれ、Z方向-側の端部に、上述の傾斜面部368f1、368f2を有する。傾斜面部368f1、368f2は、第二マグネット371a1、371b1の面取部371e1、371e2に沿う傾斜面である。 Also, the pair of side surface portions 368d1, 368d2 have the above-described inclined surface portions 368f1, 368f2 at the ends in the Z direction-side, respectively. The inclined surface portions 368f1 and 368f2 are inclined surfaces along the chamfered portions 371e1 and 371e2 of the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1.
 具体的には、傾斜面部368f1および傾斜面部368f2は、Z方向-側に向かうほど、X方向における互いの距離が短くなる方向に傾斜する。すなわち、傾斜面部368f1と傾斜面部368f2との間のX方向における距離は、Z方向-側の端部において最も小さい。このような傾斜面部368f1、368f2は、組付状態において、第二マグネット371a1、371b1のZ方向-側の抜け止めに寄与する。 Specifically, the inclined surface portion 368f1 and the inclined surface portion 368f2 are inclined in a direction in which the mutual distance in the X direction becomes shorter toward the Z direction-side. That is, the distance in the X direction between the inclined surface portion 368f1 and the inclined surface portion 368f2 is the smallest at the end portion on the negative side in the Z direction. Such inclined surface portions 368f1 and 368f2 contribute to preventing the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 from coming off in the Z direction-side in the assembled state.
 [スプリング]
 複数個(本実施形態の場合4個)のスプリング362a1~362d1(図46および図47参照)は、レンズガイド361Bを第二ベース32Aに弾性的に支持する。この状態で、レンズ部33は、第二ベース32Aに対してX方向およびY方向に変位できる。
[spring]
A plurality of (four in this embodiment) springs 362a1 to 362d1 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) elastically support the lens guide 361B on the second base 32A. In this state, the lens unit 33 can be displaced in the X direction and the Y direction with respect to the second base 32A.
 本実施形態の場合、スプリング362a1は、レンズガイド361BのX方向+側かつY方向+側の端部を第二ベース32Aに支持する(図46参照)。スプリング362b1は、レンズガイド361BのX方向+側かつY方向-側の端部を第二ベース32Aに支持する(図47参照)。スプリング362c1は、レンズガイド361BのX方向-側かつY方向+側の端部を第二ベース32に支持する(図46参照)。さらに、スプリング362d1は、レンズガイド361BのX方向-側かつY方向-側の端部を第二ベース32Aに支持する(図47参照)。 In the present embodiment, the spring 362a1 supports the end of the lens guide 361B on the X direction + side and the Y direction + side on the second base 32A (see FIG. 46). The spring 362b1 supports the end of the lens guide 361B on the X direction + side and the Y direction − side on the second base 32A (see FIG. 47). The spring 362c1 supports the end of the lens guide 361B on the X direction − side and the Y direction + side on the second base 32 (see FIG. 46). Further, the spring 362d1 supports the end of the lens guide 361B on the X direction-side and the Y direction-side on the second base 32A (see FIG. 47).
 スプリング362a1~362d1はそれぞれ、第一固定部362f1、第二固定部362g1、および弾性変形部362h1(図51参照)を有する。尚、図51は、組付状態における配置のままのスプリング362a1~362d1を示す。 Each of the springs 362a1 to 362d1 has a first fixing portion 362f1, a second fixing portion 362g1, and an elastic deformation portion 362h1 (see FIG. 51). Note that FIG. 51 shows the springs 362a1 to 362d1 in the assembled state.
 第一固定部362f1は、可動側部材であるレンズガイド361Bに固定される。第二固定部362g1は、固定側部材である第二ベース32Aに固定される。弾性変形部362h1は、第一固定部362f1と第二固定部362g1とを連続する。弾性変形部362h1は、例えば、少なくとも一部が蛇行状に曲げ成形された線状部材からなる。 The first fixed portion 362f1 is fixed to the lens guide 361B which is a movable side member. The second fixing portion 362g1 is fixed to the second base 32A that is a fixing side member. The elastic deformation portion 362h1 continues the first fixing portion 362f1 and the second fixing portion 362g1. The elastic deformation portion 362h1 is made of, for example, a linear member that is bent at least partially in a meandering shape.
 スプリング362a1~362d1の弾性変形部362h1はそれぞれ、中間部にゲル係止部362i1を有する。組付状態において、ゲル係止部362i1は、制震部材325a、325b、325c、325d(図46および図47参照)に覆われる。このようなゲル係止部362i1は、制震部材325a、325b、325c、325dと係合することにより、制震部材325a、325b、325c、325dとの密着性の向上に寄与する。 Each of the elastically deforming portions 362h1 of the springs 362a1 to 362d1 has a gel locking portion 362i1 at the intermediate portion. In the assembled state, the gel locking portion 362i1 is covered with the vibration control members 325a, 325b, 325c, and 325d (see FIGS. 46 and 47). Such a gel locking part 362i1 contributes to the improvement of adhesiveness with the vibration control members 325a, 325b, 325c, and 325d by engaging with the vibration control members 325a, 325b, 325c, and 325d.
 本実施形態の場合、ゲル係止部362i1は、弾性変形部362h1の直線部からX方向に突出するように湾曲した曲線部により構成される。スプリング362a1、362b1におけるゲル係止部362i1は、弾性変形部362h1の直線部からX方向-側に突出する。一方、スプリング362c1、362d1におけるゲル係止部362i1は、弾性変形部362h1の直線部からX方向+側に突出する。つまり、スプリング362a1、362b1におけるゲル係止部362i1と、スプリング362c1、362d1におけるゲル係止部362i1とは互いに、弾性変形部362h1の直線部からX方向における逆方向に突出する。 In the case of the present embodiment, the gel locking portion 362i1 is configured by a curved portion that is curved so as to protrude in the X direction from the straight portion of the elastic deformation portion 362h1. The gel locking portion 362i1 in the springs 362a1 and 362b1 protrudes in the X direction − side from the straight portion of the elastic deformation portion 362h1. On the other hand, the gel locking part 362i1 in the springs 362c1 and 362d1 protrudes from the straight part of the elastic deformation part 362h1 in the X direction + side. That is, the gel locking part 362i1 in the springs 362a1 and 362b1 and the gel locking part 362i1 in the springs 362c1 and 362d1 protrude from the linear part of the elastic deformation part 362h1 in the opposite direction in the X direction.
 ゲル係止部362i1の形状は、本実施形態の場合に限定されない。図52Bに示すゲル係止部362i2は、ゲル係止部362i1の変形例である。ゲル係止部362i2は、連続部362jおよび環状部362kを有する。 The shape of the gel locking part 362i1 is not limited to the case of this embodiment. A gel locking part 362i2 shown in FIG. 52B is a modification of the gel locking part 362i1. The gel locking part 362i2 has a continuous part 362j and an annular part 362k.
 連続部362jは、弾性変形部362h1の直線部からX方向に、直線状に延在する。環状部362kは、環状であって、連続部362jの先端部に連続する。連続部362jは、直線状でなくてもよい。スプリング362a1、362b1における連続部362jは、弾性変形部362h1の直線部からX方向-側に延在する。一方、スプリング362c1、362d1における連続部362jは、弾性変形部362h1の直線部からX方向+側に延在する。たとえば、連続部362jは、蛇行状であってもよい。また、環状部362kの形状は、図示の場合に限定されない。たとえば、環状部362kの形状は、円形、楕円形、多角形であってもよい。なお、図52Cに示すように、ゲル係止部362i2は、省略されてもよい。 The continuous portion 362j extends linearly in the X direction from the straight portion of the elastic deformation portion 362h1. The annular portion 362k is annular and continues to the tip of the continuous portion 362j. The continuous part 362j may not be linear. The continuous portion 362j in the springs 362a1 and 362b1 extends from the straight portion of the elastic deformation portion 362h1 to the X direction-side. On the other hand, the continuous part 362j in the springs 362c1 and 362d1 extends from the straight part of the elastic deformation part 362h1 to the X direction + side. For example, the continuous part 362j may have a meandering shape. Further, the shape of the annular portion 362k is not limited to the illustrated case. For example, the shape of the annular portion 362k may be a circle, an ellipse, or a polygon. As shown in FIG. 52C, the gel locking portion 362i2 may be omitted.
 組付状態において、スプリング362a1~362d1はそれぞれ、第二ベース32Aのスプリング配置部324a1~324d1(図46および図47参照)に配置される。この状態において、スプリング362a1~362d1のゲル係止部362i1はそれぞれ、スプリング配置部324a1~324d1におけるゲル配置部324e~324hに配置される。そして、スプリング362a1~362d1のゲル係止部362i1はそれぞれ、ゲル配置部324e~324hに配置されたゲル状の制震部材325a~325dにより覆われる。 In the assembled state, the springs 362a1 to 362d1 are arranged in the spring arrangement portions 324a1 to 324d1 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) of the second base 32A, respectively. In this state, the gel locking portions 362i1 of the springs 362a1 to 362d1 are arranged in the gel arrangement portions 324e to 324h in the spring arrangement portions 324a1 to 324d1, respectively. The gel locking portions 362i1 of the springs 362a1 to 362d1 are covered with gel-like vibration control members 325a to 325d arranged in the gel arrangement portions 324e to 324h, respectively.
 なお、本実施形態の場合、弾性変形部362hは、X方向において方向性を有する。スプリング362a1とスプリング362b1とは、X方向において同方向となるように配置される。換言すれば、スプリング362a1とスプリング362b1とは、Y方向からの平面視で、少なくとも弾性変形部362h1が重なるように配置される。 In the case of the present embodiment, the elastic deformation portion 362h has directionality in the X direction. The spring 362a1 and the spring 362b1 are arranged in the same direction in the X direction. In other words, the spring 362a1 and the spring 362b1 are arranged so that at least the elastic deformation portion 362h1 overlaps in a plan view from the Y direction.
 スプリング362c1とスプリング362d1とは、X方向において同方向となるように配置される。換言すれば、スプリング362c1とスプリング362d1とは、Y方向からの平面視で、少なくとも弾性変形部362h1が重なるように配置される。 The spring 362c1 and the spring 362d1 are arranged to be in the same direction in the X direction. In other words, the spring 362c1 and the spring 362d1 are arranged such that at least the elastic deformation portion 362h1 overlaps in a plan view from the Y direction.
 スプリング362a1とスプリング362c1とは、X方向において、弾性変形部362h1のゲル係止部362i2のみが逆方向を向くように配置される。すなわち、スプリング362a1とスプリング362c1とは、X方向において、弾性変形部362h1のゲル係止部362i2以外の部分が同方向を向くように配置される。 The spring 362a1 and the spring 362c1 are arranged so that only the gel locking part 362i2 of the elastically deforming part 362h1 faces in the opposite direction in the X direction. In other words, the spring 362a1 and the spring 362c1 are arranged such that portions other than the gel locking portion 362i2 of the elastic deformation portion 362h1 face the same direction in the X direction.
 スプリング362b1とスプリング362d1とは、X方向において、弾性変形部362h1のゲル係止部362i2のみが逆方向を向くように配置される。すなわち、スプリング362b1とスプリング362d1とは、X方向において、弾性変形部362h1のゲル係止部362i2以外の部分が同方向を向くように配置される。 The spring 362b1 and the spring 362d1 are arranged so that only the gel locking part 362i2 of the elastically deforming part 362h1 faces in the opposite direction in the X direction. That is, the spring 362b1 and the spring 362d1 are arranged such that the portions other than the gel locking portion 362i2 of the elastically deforming portion 362h1 face the same direction in the X direction.
 [FPC]
 FPC363B(図50参照)は、フレキシブルプリント回路基板であって、第二ベース32A(図46および図47参照)に固定される。FPC363Bは、例えば、後述するAF装置36Aおよび第二振れ補正装置37Aの第二アクチュエータ370a1、370b1に電力を供給する。
[FPC]
The FPC 363B (see FIG. 50) is a flexible printed circuit board, and is fixed to the second base 32A (see FIGS. 46 and 47). For example, the FPC 363B supplies power to second actuators 370a1 and 370b1 of an AF device 36A and a second shake correction device 37A described later.
 具体的には、FPC363Bは、連続した一枚のフレキシブルプリント回路基板であって、FPC基部363hと、一対の第一コイル固定部363a、363b、および一対の第二コイル固定部363d、363eを有する。 Specifically, the FPC 363B is a single continuous flexible printed circuit board, and includes an FPC base portion 363h, a pair of first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b, and a pair of second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e. .
 FPC基部363hは、Y方向に延在する板状部材であって、第二ベース32Aの底面部321(図46および図47参照)に固定される。第一コイル固定部363aには、AF装置36AのAF用コイル366a(図48参照)が基板7aを介して固定される。この状態で、第一コイル固定部363aおよびAF用コイル366aは、第二ベース32Aの底面貫通孔321a(図15参照)に配置される。 The FPC base portion 363h is a plate-like member extending in the Y direction, and is fixed to the bottom surface portion 321 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) of the second base 32A. An AF coil 366a (see FIG. 48) of the AF device 36A is fixed to the first coil fixing portion 363a via the substrate 7a. In this state, the first coil fixing portion 363a and the AF coil 366a are disposed in the bottom surface through hole 321a (see FIG. 15) of the second base 32A.
 一方、第一コイル固定部363bには、AF装置36AのAF用コイル366b(図49参照)が、基板7bを介して固定される。この状態で、第一コイル固定部363bおよびAF用コイル366bは、第二ベース32Aの底面貫通孔321bに配置される。 Meanwhile, the AF coil 366b (see FIG. 49) of the AF device 36A is fixed to the first coil fixing portion 363b via the substrate 7b. In this state, the first coil fixing portion 363b and the AF coil 366b are disposed in the bottom surface through hole 321b of the second base 32A.
 第二コイル固定部363d、363eはそれぞれ、第一コイル固定部363a、363bに対してZ方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なる。第二コイル固定部363d、363eの表面にはそれぞれ、後述する第二振れ補正装置37Aの第二コイル372a、372bが固定される(図48および図49参照)。この状態で、第二コイル固定部363d、363eはそれぞれ、第二ベース32Aのコイル載置部322d、コイル載置部322e(図11参照)の表面に載置される。 The second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e respectively overlap the first coil fixing portions 363a and 363b with a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Second coils 372a and 372b of a second shake correction device 37A described later are fixed to the surfaces of the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e, respectively (see FIGS. 48 and 49). In this state, the second coil fixing portions 363d and 363e are placed on the surfaces of the coil placing portion 322d and the coil placing portion 322e (see FIG. 11) of the second base 32A, respectively.
 第二コイル固定部363dは、第一連続部363iを介して、FPC基部363hに連続する。第一連続部363iは、ZY平面に平行は板状部材である。第一連続部363iは、第二ベース32Aにおける第二側壁部322a1のY方向+側の側面に形成されたスリット322i(図46参照)に配置される。 The second coil fixing portion 363d continues to the FPC base portion 363h through the first continuous portion 363i. The first continuous portion 363i is a plate-like member that is parallel to the ZY plane. The first continuous portion 363i is disposed in a slit 322i (see FIG. 46) formed on the side surface on the Y direction + side of the second side wall portion 322a1 in the second base 32A.
 一方、第二コイル固定部363eは、第二連続部363jを介して、FPC基部363hに連続する。第二連続部363jは、XZ平面に平行は板状部材である。第二連続部363jは、第二ベース32Aにおける第二側壁部322b1の凹部322j(図47参照)に配置される。 On the other hand, the second coil fixing portion 363e continues to the FPC base portion 363h via the second continuous portion 363j. The second continuous portion 363j is a plate-like member that is parallel to the XZ plane. The second continuous portion 363j is disposed in the concave portion 322j (see FIG. 47) of the second side wall portion 322b1 in the second base 32A.
 [AFアクチュエータ]
 一対のAFアクチュエータ364a1、364b1(図48および図49参照)はそれぞれ、オートフォーカス用となる第三アクチュエータである。Y方向+側のAFアクチュエータ364a1は、AF用マグネット365a1、およびAF用コイル366aを有する。一方、Y方向-側のAFアクチュエータ364b1は、AF用マグネット365b1、AF用コイル366b、およびAF用ホール素子367を有する。以下、一対のAFアクチュエータ364a1、364b1について、前述の実施形態1と相違する部分の構造を中心に説明する。
[AF actuator]
The pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) are third actuators for autofocus. The AF actuator 364a1 on the Y direction + side includes an AF magnet 365a1 and an AF coil 366a. On the other hand, the Y-direction-side AF actuator 364b1 includes an AF magnet 365b1, an AF coil 366b, and an AF Hall element 367. Hereinafter, the pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1 will be described with a focus on the structure of the portion different from the first embodiment.
 AF用マグネット365a1、365b1はそれぞれ、X方向に長く、かつ、Y方向からの平面視(図48および図49に示す状態)の形状が略六角形状の六角柱状である。 Each of the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 has a hexagonal column shape that is long in the X direction and has a substantially hexagonal shape in a plan view from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 48 and 49).
 AF用マグネット365a1、365b1はそれぞれ、一対の面取部365c1、365c2を有する。一対の面取部365c1、365c2はそれぞれ、AF用マグネット365a1、365b1においてX方向に対向する一対の側面に設けられる。面取部365c1と面取部365c2とは、X方向からの平面視で重なる。また、面取部365c1および面取部365c2は、Y方向からの平面視で、Z方向-側に向かうほどX方向における互いの距離が近づく方向に傾斜する。 AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1 each have a pair of chamfered portions 365c1 and 365c2. The pair of chamfered portions 365c1 and 365c2 are provided on a pair of side surfaces facing in the X direction in the AF magnets 365a1 and 365b1, respectively. The chamfered portion 365c1 and the chamfered portion 365c2 overlap in plan view from the X direction. Further, the chamfered portion 365c1 and the chamfered portion 365c2 are inclined in a direction in which the distance between the chamfered portion 365c1 and the chamfered portion 365c2 approaches each other in the X direction toward the Z direction minus side in plan view from the Y direction.
 このような面取部365c1および面取部365c2はそれぞれ、組付状態において、レンズガイド361Bにおける一対の第一マグネット保持部361a1、361b1の傾斜面部361e1、361e2と対面する。その他の、一対のAFアクチュエータ364a1、364b1の構造は、前述の実施形態1の一対のAFアクチュエータ364a、364bと同様である。 Such chamfered portion 365c1 and chamfered portion 365c2 respectively face the inclined surface portions 361e1 and 361e2 of the pair of first magnet holding portions 361a1 and 361b1 in the lens guide 361B in the assembled state. Other structures of the pair of AF actuators 364a1 and 364b1 are the same as those of the pair of AF actuators 364a and 364b of the first embodiment.
 [第二振れ補正装置]
 第二振れ補正装置37A(図48および図49参照)は、レンズ部33をY方向に変位させることにより、Y方向の振れ補正を行う。このような第二振れ補正装置37Aは、上述の第二収容空間320(図4参照)に配置される。
[Second shake correction device]
The second shake correction device 37A (see FIGS. 48 and 49) performs shake correction in the Y direction by displacing the lens unit 33 in the Y direction. Such a second shake correction device 37A is disposed in the second accommodation space 320 (see FIG. 4).
 第二振れ補正装置37Aは、上述したレンズガイド361B、上述した複数個のスプリング362a1~362d1、上述したFPC363B、および一対の第二アクチュエータ370a1、370b1を有する。レンズガイド361B、スプリング362a1~362d1、およびFPC363Bは、AF装置36Aと共通である。 The second shake correction device 37A includes the lens guide 361B described above, the plurality of springs 362a1 to 362d1 described above, the FPC 363B described above, and a pair of second actuators 370a1 and 370b1. The lens guide 361B, the springs 362a1 to 362d1, and the FPC 363B are common to the AF device 36A.
 Y方向+側の第二アクチュエータ370a1(図48参照)は、上述のAFアクチュエータ364a1に対して、Z方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なった状態で配置される。このような第二アクチュエータ370a1は、第二マグネット371a1、および第二コイル372aを有する。第二コイル372aは、前述の実施形態1と同様である。 The second actuator 370a1 (see FIG. 48) on the Y direction + side is arranged in a state where it overlaps the above-described AF actuator 364a1 with a predetermined interval in the Z direction. Such a second actuator 370a1 has a second magnet 371a1 and a second coil 372a. The second coil 372a is the same as that in the first embodiment.
 一方、Y方向-側の第二アクチュエータ370b1(図49参照)は、上述のAFアクチュエータ364b1に対して、Z方向に所定の間隔をあけて重なった状態で配置される。このような第二アクチュエータ370a1は、第二マグネット371b1、第二コイル372b、および第二ホール素子373を有する。第二コイル372b、および第二ホール素子373は、前述の実施形態1と同様である。以下、一対の第二アクチュエータ370a1、370b1について、前述の実施形態1と相違する部分の構造を中心に説明する。 On the other hand, the second actuator 370b1 (see FIG. 49) on the Y-direction side is arranged in a state of being overlapped with the above-described AF actuator 364b1 at a predetermined interval in the Z-direction. Such a second actuator 370a1 includes a second magnet 371b1, a second coil 372b, and a second Hall element 373. The second coil 372b and the second Hall element 373 are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the pair of second actuators 370a1 and 370b1 will be described focusing on the structure of the portion different from the first embodiment.
 一対の第二アクチュエータ370a1、370b1の第二マグネット371a1、371b1はそれぞれ、レンズガイド361Bの第二マグネット保持部368a1、368b1に保持される。 The second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 of the pair of second actuators 370a1 and 370b1 are respectively held by the second magnet holding portions 368a1 and 368b1 of the lens guide 361B.
 第二マグネット371a1、371b1はそれぞれ、X方向に長く、かつ、Y方向からの平面視(図48および図49に示す状態)の形状が略六角形状の六角柱状である。 The second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 each have a hexagonal column shape that is long in the X direction and has a substantially hexagonal shape in a plan view from the Y direction (the state shown in FIGS. 48 and 49).
 第二マグネット371a1、371b1はそれぞれ、一対の面取部371e1、371e2を有する。一対の面取部371e1、371e2はそれぞれ、第二マグネット371a1、371b1においてX方向に対向する一対の側面に設けられる。面取部371e1と面取部371e2とは、X方向からの平面視で重なる。また、面取部371e1および面取部371e2は、Y方向からの平面視で、Z方向-側に向かうほどX方向における互いの距離が近づく方向に傾斜する。 The second magnets 371a1 and 371b1 have a pair of chamfered portions 371e1 and 371e2, respectively. The pair of chamfered portions 371e1 and 371e2 are provided on the pair of side surfaces facing the X direction in the second magnets 371a1 and 371b1, respectively. The chamfered portion 371e1 and the chamfered portion 371e2 overlap in plan view from the X direction. Further, the chamfered portion 371e1 and the chamfered portion 371e2 are inclined in a direction in which the mutual distance in the X direction becomes closer toward the Z direction minus side in a plan view from the Y direction.
 このような面取部371e1および面取部371e2はそれぞれ、組付状態において、レンズガイド361Bにおける一対の第二マグネット保持部368a1、368b1の傾斜面部368f1、368f2と対面する。一対の第二アクチュエータ370a1、370b1におけるその他の部分の構造は、前述の実施形態1の一対の第二アクチュエータ370a、370bと同様である。また、本実施形態に係るカメラモジュールにおいて、上述の説明以外の部分の構成および作用・効果については、前述の実施形態1と同様である。 Such chamfered portion 371e1 and chamfered portion 371e2 respectively face the inclined surface portions 368f1, 368f2 of the pair of second magnet holding portions 368a1, 368b1 in the lens guide 361B in the assembled state. The other parts of the structure of the pair of second actuators 370a1 and 370b1 are the same as those of the pair of second actuators 370a and 370b in the first embodiment. Further, in the camera module according to the present embodiment, the configuration, operation, and effects other than those described above are the same as those in the first embodiment.
 2017年5月25日出願の特願2017-103954、2017年6月19日出願の特願2017-119447、および2017年10月30日出願の特願2017-209582の日本出願に含まれる明細書、図面および要約書の開示内容は、すべて本願に援用される。 Japanese Patent Application No. 2017-103954 filed on May 25, 2017, Japanese Patent Application No. 2017-119447 filed on June 19, 2017, and Japanese Patent Application No. 2017-209582 filed on October 30, 2017 The disclosures of the drawings and abstract are all incorporated herein by reference.
 本発明に係るカメラ用アクチュエータおよびカメラモジュールは、例えば、スマートフォン、携帯電話機、デジタルカメラ、ノート型パソコン、タブレット端末、携帯型ゲーム機、車載カメラなどの薄型のカメラ搭載装置に搭載できる。 The camera actuator and camera module according to the present invention can be mounted on a thin camera mounting device such as a smartphone, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a notebook computer, a tablet terminal, a portable game machine, or an in-vehicle camera.
 1、1a カメラモジュール
 2、2a、2b、2c プリズムモジュール
 21 第一カバー
 22、22a、22b 第一ベース
 220 ベース第一開口部
 223 第一収容空間
 224a、224b、224a1、224b1 第一側壁部
 224c1、224c2 第一堰部
 224d1、224d2 第二堰部
 224e1、224e2、224f1、224f2 バネ配置空間
 224g1、224g2、224g3 凸部
 224h1、224h2、224h3 凸部
 225a 第一軸受部
 225b 第二軸受部
 225c、225c1 第一受部
 225d、225d1 第二受部
 225e、225f ストッパ面
 226、226a、226a1 第一位置決め凸部
 227、227a、227a1 第二位置決め凸部
 228 第三位置決め凸部
 229、229b 底壁部
 229a 底溝
 23 プリズム
 231 光路屈曲面
 24、24a、24b 第一振れ補正装置
 241、241A、241B ホルダ
 241a 載置面
 241c、241d 揺動支持部
 241f、241g 対向壁部
 241i、241k 被押圧部
 241m、241n、241p 衝突防止凸部
 241q、241r、241q1、241r1 張出し部
 241s、241t バネ座面
 241u ホルダ側位置決め凸部
 242 抑えバネ
 242a 固定基部
 242c 押圧部
 242e バネ側第一孔
 242g バネ側第二孔
 242i バネ側第三孔
 243、243A 揺動支持バネ
 243a、243b、243a1、243b1 第一係止部
 243c、243c1 第二係止部
 243d、243e、243d1、243e1 第一貫通孔
 243f、243f1 第二貫通孔
 243g、243g1 捩じれ許容部
 243h、243h1 バネ側ガイド面
 243i、243i1 連続部
 243j、243k 連続部要素
 243j1 基端側連続部
 243j2 蛇行連続部
 244、244A 第一アクチュエータ
 244a 第一マグネット
 244c 第一コイル
 244e 第一ホール素子
 244f 第一マグネット
 245 揺動ガイド部材
 245a 揺動ガイド面
 246 スペーサ
 246a スペーサ側貫通孔
 25 FPC
 26 ヨーク
 27 制震部材
 3、3a レンズモジュール
 31 第二カバー
 32、32A 第二ベース
 320 第二収容空間
 321 底面部
 321a、321b 底面貫通孔
 322a、322b、322a1、322b1 第二側壁部
 322d、322e コイル載置部
 322g、322h マグネット用空間
 322i スリット
 322j 凹部
 323 補強プレート
 324a、324b、324c、324d、324a1、324b1、324c1、324d1 スプリング配置部
 324e、324f、324g、324h ゲル配置部
 325a、325b、325c、325d 制震部材
 33 レンズ部
 36、36A AF装置
 361、361A、361B レンズガイド
 361a、361b、361a1、361b1 第一マグネット保持部
 361c1、361c2 側面部
 361d 上面部
 361e1、361e2 傾斜面部
 362a、362b、362c、362d、362a1、362b1、362c1、362d1 スプリング
 362f、362f1 第一固定部
 362g、362g1 第二固定部
 362h、362h1 弾性変形部
 362i1、362i2 ゲル係止部
 362j 連続部
 362k 環状部
 363、363A、363B FPC
 363a、363b 第一コイル固定部
 363d、363e、363f、363g 第二コイル固定部
 363h FPC基部
 363i 第一連続部
 363j 第二連続部
 364a、364b、364c、364d、364e、364f、364a1、364b1 AFアクチュエータ(第三アクチュエータ)
 365a、365b、365a1、365b1 AF用マグネット
 365c1、365c2 面取部
 366a、366b AF用コイル
 367、367a AF用ホール素子
 368a、368b、368a1、368b1 第二マグネット保持部
 368d1、371d2 側面部
 368e 上面部
 368f1、368f2 傾斜面部
 368c 第三マグネット保持部
 369a、369b AF用第二マグネット
 37、37A 第二振れ補正装置
 370a、370b、370c、370d、370e、370f、370g、370h、370i、370j、370a1、370b1 第二アクチュエータ
 371a、371b、371c、371d、371a1、371b1 第二マグネット
 371e1、371e2 面取部
 372a、372b 第二コイル
 373 第二ホール素子
 374a、374b 第三マグネット
 38 基準部材
 38a 貫通孔
 380a、380b ストッパ部
 391a、391b、391c、391d 第一補強プレート
 392a、392b、392c、392d 第二補強プレート
 4 撮像素子モジュール
 6a、6b シールド板
 7a、7b 基板
1, 1a Camera module 2, 2a, 2b, 2c Prism module 21 First cover 22, 22a, 22b First base 220 Base first opening 223 First accommodating space 224a, 224b, 224a1, 224b1 First side wall 224c1, 224c2 First dam portion 224d1, 224d2 Second dam portion 224e1, 224e2, 224f1, 224f2 Spring arrangement space 224g1, 224g2, 224g3 Convex portion 224h1, 224h2, 224h3 Convex portion 225a First bearing portion 225b Second bearing portion 225c, 225c1 First One receiving part 225d, 225d1 Second receiving part 225e, 225f Stopper surface 226, 226a, 226a1 First positioning convex part 227, 227a, 227a1 Second positioning convex part 228 Third positioning convex part 229, 229b Wall portion 229a Bottom groove 23 Prism 231 Optical path bending surface 24, 24a, 24b First shake correction device 241, 241A, 241B Holder 241a Placement surface 241c, 241d Oscillation support portion 241f, 241g Opposing wall portion 241i, 241k Pressed portion 241m, 241n, 241p Collision prevention convex part 241q, 241r, 241q1, 241r1 Overhang part 241s, 241t Spring seat surface 241u Holder side positioning convex part 242 Holding spring 242a Fixed base part 242c Press part 242e Spring side first hole 242g Spring side second hole 242g Hole 242i Spring side third hole 243, 243A Swing support springs 243a, 243b, 243a1, 243b1 First locking portion 243c, 243c1 Second locking portion 243d, 243e, 243d1, 243e1 First through hole 243f, 243f Second through-hole 243g, 243g1 Twisting allowable portion 243h, 243h1 Spring-side guide surface 243i, 243i1 continuous portion 243j, 243k continuous portion element 243j1 base end-side continuous portion 243j2 meandering continuous portion 244, 244A first actuator 244a first magnet 244c first One coil 244e First Hall element 244f First magnet 245 Swing guide member 245a Swing guide surface 246 Spacer 246a Spacer side through hole 25 FPC
26 Yoke 27 Damping member 3, 3a Lens module 31 Second cover 32, 32A Second base 320 Second receiving space 321 Bottom surface portion 321a, 321b Bottom through hole 322a, 322b, 322a1, 322b1 Second side wall portion 322d, 322e Coil Placement part 322g, 322h Magnet space 322i Slit 322j Recess 323 Reinforcement plate 324a, 324b, 324c, 324d, 324a1, 324b1, 324c1, 324d1 Spring arrangement part 324e, 324f, 324g, 324h Gel arrangement part 325a, 325b, 325c, 325d Damping member 33 Lens part 36, 36A AF device 361, 361A, 361B Lens guide 361a, 361b, 361a1, 361b1 First magnet holding part 361c , 361c2 Side surface part 361d Upper surface part 361e1, 361e2 Inclined surface part 362a, 362b, 362c, 362d, 362a1, 362b1, 362c1, 362d1 Spring 362f, 362f1 First fixing part 362g, 362g1 Second fixing part 362h 362h 362i2 Gel locking part 362j Continuous part 362k Annular part 363, 363A, 363B FPC
363a, 363b First coil fixing part 363d, 363e, 363f, 363g Second coil fixing part 363h FPC base 363i First continuous part 363j Second continuous part 364a, 364b, 364c, 364d, 364e, 364f, 364a1, 364b1 AF actuator (Third actuator)
365a, 365b, 365a1, 365b1 AF magnet 365c1, 365c2 Chamfered portion 366a, 366b AF coil 367, 367a AF hall element 368a, 368b, 368a1, 368b1 Second magnet holding portion 368d1, 371d2 Side surface portion 368f Upper surface portion 368f 368f2 Inclined surface portion 368c Third magnet holding portion 369a, 369b Second magnet for AF 37, 37A Second shake correction device 370a, 370b, 370c, 370d, 370e, 370f, 370g, 370h, 370i, 370j, 370a1, 370b1 Two actuators 371a, 371b, 371c, 371d, 371a1, 371b1 Second magnet 371e1, 371e2 Chamfer 372a, 372b Second carp 373 Second Hall element 374a, 374b Third magnet 38 Reference member 38a Through hole 380a, 380b Stopper portion 391a, 391b, 391c, 391d First reinforcing plate 392a, 392b, 392c, 392d Second reinforcing plate 4 Imaging element module 6a, 6b Shield plate 7a, 7b Board

Claims (18)

  1.  光路屈曲部材と、
     前記光路屈曲部材の後段に配置されたレンズ部と、
     前記光路屈曲部材の近傍に配置され、前記光路屈曲部材を変位させる第一アクチュエータと、
     前記レンズ部の近傍で第一方向において互いに離間して配置され、前記レンズ部を、前記第一方向に直交しかつ互いに直交する第二方向および第三方向のそれぞれにおいて変位させる第二アクチュエータおよび第三アクチュエータと、
     を備えるカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    An optical path bending member;
    A lens portion disposed at a subsequent stage of the optical path bending member;
    A first actuator disposed near the optical path bending member and displacing the optical path bending member;
    A second actuator disposed in the vicinity of the lens portion and spaced apart from each other in the first direction, and displacing the lens portion in each of a second direction and a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and orthogonal to each other; Three actuators,
    A camera actuator comprising:
  2.  前記光路屈曲部材は光路屈曲面を有し、
     前記第一アクチュエータは、前記光路屈曲部材に対して前記光路屈曲面の裏側に配置される、
     請求項1に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    The optical path bending member has an optical path bending surface,
    The first actuator is disposed on the back side of the optical path bending surface with respect to the optical path bending member.
    The actuator for cameras according to claim 1.
  3.  前記光路屈曲部材は、第一光軸の方向に沿う入射光を第二光軸の方向に屈曲させ、
     前記光路屈曲部材および前記第一アクチュエータは、前記第一光軸の方向において互いに離間して配置される、
     請求項1に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    The optical path bending member bends incident light along the direction of the first optical axis in the direction of the second optical axis,
    The optical path bending member and the first actuator are arranged apart from each other in the direction of the first optical axis.
    The actuator for cameras according to claim 1.
  4.  前記光路屈曲部材は、第一光軸の方向に沿う入射光を第二光軸の方向に屈曲させ、
     前記第一方向は、前記第一光軸の方向に一致している、
     請求項1に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    The optical path bending member bends incident light along the direction of the first optical axis in the direction of the second optical axis,
    The first direction coincides with the direction of the first optical axis.
    The actuator for cameras according to claim 1.
  5.  前記第一光軸の方向は、前記カメラ用アクチュエータの上部から底部に向かって延在し、
     前記第一アクチュエータは、前記カメラ用アクチュエータの底部に配置される、
     請求項3または4に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    The direction of the first optical axis extends from the top to the bottom of the camera actuator,
    The first actuator is disposed at the bottom of the camera actuator.
    The camera actuator according to claim 3 or 4.
  6.  前記第一アクチュエータは、前記第一光軸の方向および前記第二光軸の方向に直交する揺動中心軸を中心に前記光路屈曲部材を揺動させる、請求項3または4に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 5. The camera according to claim 3, wherein the first actuator swings the optical path bending member about a swing center axis orthogonal to the direction of the first optical axis and the direction of the second optical axis. Actuator.
  7.  前記第二アクチュエータは、前記第一光軸の方向および前記第二光軸の方向に直交する方向に前記レンズ部を変位させる、請求項3または4に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 The camera actuator according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the second actuator displaces the lens unit in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the first optical axis and the direction of the second optical axis.
  8.  前記第一アクチュエータおよび前記第二アクチュエータは、振れ補正用アクチュエータを構成し、
     前記第三アクチュエータは、オートフォーカス用アクチュエータを構成する、
     請求項1に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    The first actuator and the second actuator constitute a shake correction actuator,
    The third actuator constitutes an autofocus actuator.
    The actuator for cameras according to claim 1.
  9.  前記光路屈曲部材を保持するホルダと、
     前記ホルダを揺動可能に支持する軸受部を有する第一ベースと、
     前記ホルダを前記第一ベースに向けて付勢する付勢機構と、をさらに備える請求項1に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    A holder for holding the optical path bending member;
    A first base having a bearing portion that supports the holder in a swingable manner;
    The camera actuator according to claim 1, further comprising a biasing mechanism that biases the holder toward the first base.
  10.  前記付勢機構が、前記ホルダを、前記ホルダの幅方向における両側から幅方向の中央部に向かって付勢する、請求項9に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 The camera actuator according to claim 9, wherein the biasing mechanism biases the holder from both sides in the width direction of the holder toward a center portion in the width direction.
  11.  前記付勢機構が、前記ホルダを前記第一ベースに対して付勢するとともに、前記ホルダの幅方向における両側から幅方向の中央部に向かって付勢するバネ部材である、請求項10に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 The said urging mechanism is a spring member which urges | biases the said holder with respect to said 1st base, and urges | biases from the both sides in the width direction of the said holder toward the center part of the width direction. Camera actuators.
  12.  前記付勢機構が、前記ホルダに固定された第一マグネットと、前記第一ベースに固定されたヨークと、により構成され、
     前記付勢機構は、前記第一マグネットと前記ヨークとの間に生じる磁力に基づいて、前記ホルダを前記第一ベースに対して付勢する、請求項9に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    The urging mechanism includes a first magnet fixed to the holder, and a yoke fixed to the first base,
    The camera actuator according to claim 9, wherein the biasing mechanism biases the holder against the first base based on a magnetic force generated between the first magnet and the yoke.
  13.  前記レンズ部を保持するレンズガイドと、
     前記レンズガイドを収容可能な第二ベースと、
     前記第二方向および前記第三方向の変位を可能に、前記レンズガイドを前記第二ベースに支持する複数個のスプリングと、を備える請求項1に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    A lens guide for holding the lens unit;
    A second base capable of accommodating the lens guide;
    The camera actuator according to claim 1, further comprising: a plurality of springs that support the lens guide on the second base so as to allow displacement in the second direction and the third direction.
  14.  前記複数個のスプリングが、前記レンズガイドの周辺に分散配置され、前記複数個のスプリングの分散配置の中心位置が、前記レンズガイドおよび前記レンズガイドとともに変位可能な部材により構成される可動部の重心位置と一致している、請求項13に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。 The plurality of springs are dispersedly arranged around the lens guide, and the center position of the dispersed arrangement of the plurality of springs is the center of gravity of the movable part configured by the lens guide and a member that can be displaced together with the lens guide. The camera actuator according to claim 13, wherein the camera actuator matches the position.
  15.  前記光路屈曲部材を保持するホルダと、
     前記ホルダを揺動可能に支持する第一ベースと、
     前記ホルダと前記第一ベースとの間に設けられ、少なくとも一部に球面状の揺動ガイド面を有する揺動ガイド部材と、をさらに備え、
     前記ホルダは、前記揺動ガイド部材を介して、前記第一ベースに揺動可能に支持されている、
     請求項1に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    A holder for holding the optical path bending member;
    A first base for swingably supporting the holder;
    A swing guide member provided between the holder and the first base and having a spherical swing guide surface at least in part;
    The holder is swingably supported on the first base via the swing guide member.
    The actuator for cameras according to claim 1.
  16.  前記レンズ部を保持するレンズガイドを、さらに備え、
     前記第二アクチュエータおよび前記第三アクチュエータのうちの少なくとも一方のアクチュエータは、所定方向に対向する一対の側面に一対の面取部が形成されたマグネットを有し、
     前記レンズガイドは、
     一対の傾斜面部を有するマグネット保持部であって、前記一対の面取部と前記一対の傾斜面部とが対向した状態で前記マグネットを保持する前記マグネット保持部を有する、
     請求項1に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータ。
    A lens guide for holding the lens unit;
    At least one of the second actuator and the third actuator has a magnet having a pair of chamfered portions formed on a pair of side surfaces opposed to each other in a predetermined direction,
    The lens guide is
    A magnet holding portion having a pair of inclined surface portions, the magnet holding portion holding the magnet in a state where the pair of chamfered portions and the pair of inclined surface portions are opposed to each other;
    The actuator for cameras according to claim 1.
  17.  請求項1に記載のカメラ用アクチュエータと、
     レンズ部の後段に配置された撮像素子と、
     を備えるカメラモジュール。
    An actuator for a camera according to claim 1;
    An image sensor disposed at the rear stage of the lens unit;
    A camera module comprising:
  18.  請求項17に記載のカメラモジュールと、
     前記カメラモジュールを制御する制御部と、
     を有するカメラ搭載装置。
    A camera module according to claim 17,
    A control unit for controlling the camera module;
    A camera-equipped device.
PCT/JP2018/020037 2017-05-25 2018-05-24 Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounted device WO2018216778A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020197033852A KR102304672B1 (en) 2017-05-25 2018-05-24 Actuators for Cameras, Camera Modules, and Camera Mounting Devices
EP18806620.3A EP3633446A4 (en) 2017-05-25 2018-05-24 Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounted device
US16/616,516 US11567338B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2018-05-24 Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounted device
CN201880034114.4A CN110662998B (en) 2017-05-25 2018-05-24 Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device
CN202210490204.2A CN115220282B (en) 2017-05-25 2018-05-24 Actuator for camera, camera module, and camera mounting device

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017-103954 2017-05-25
JP2017103954 2017-05-25
JP2017-119447 2017-06-19
JP2017119447 2017-06-19
JP2017-209582 2017-10-30
JP2017209582A JP6997370B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2017-10-30 Camera actuators, camera modules, and camera-mounted devices

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018216778A1 true WO2018216778A1 (en) 2018-11-29

Family

ID=64396499

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/020037 WO2018216778A1 (en) 2017-05-25 2018-05-24 Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounted device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7231865B2 (en)
CN (1) CN115220282B (en)
WO (1) WO2018216778A1 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109819622A (en) * 2019-03-18 2019-05-28 深圳市沃特沃德股份有限公司 Mainboard mounting structure and electronic equipment
WO2021020445A1 (en) * 2019-08-01 2021-02-04 日本電産サンキョー株式会社 Optical unit
CN112540439A (en) * 2019-09-05 2021-03-23 新思考电机有限公司 Lens driving device, camera device and electronic equipment
WO2021234995A1 (en) * 2020-05-22 2021-11-25 日本電産株式会社 Optical unit
CN114303359A (en) * 2019-07-23 2022-04-08 Lg 伊诺特有限公司 Camera actuator, camera module including the same, and camera apparatus
US20220394163A1 (en) * 2021-06-08 2022-12-08 Mitsumi Electric Co., Ltd. Optical actuator, camera module, and camera-mounted apparatus
JP7417418B2 (en) 2018-12-27 2024-01-18 台湾東電化股▲ふん▼有限公司 Optical element drive mechanism
EP4242742A4 (en) * 2020-12-07 2024-05-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Camera module for supporting optical zoom, and electronic device comprising same

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008124763A (en) * 2006-11-10 2008-05-29 Canon Inc Imaging apparatus, control method, and program
JP2012083604A (en) * 2010-10-13 2012-04-26 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Camera shake correcting device, camera cone, and image pickup apparatus
JP2015092285A (en) 2015-02-03 2015-05-14 株式会社ファイブ・ディー Vibration-proof device for folded zoom camera module
JP2017103954A (en) 2015-12-03 2017-06-08 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Piezoelectric driving device, motor, robot, and pump
JP2017119447A (en) 2015-12-28 2017-07-06 株式会社トモキスペシャルパーツ Light emission shift knob
JP2017209582A (en) 2017-09-11 2017-11-30 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Family Cites Families (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005070609A (en) * 2003-08-27 2005-03-17 Sankyo Seiki Mfg Co Ltd Method for driving lens driving device and lens driving device and camera
JP2009246932A (en) * 2008-03-13 2009-10-22 Olympus Imaging Corp Photographing lens unit and electronic apparatus using it
JP5787510B2 (en) * 2010-12-01 2015-09-30 株式会社ファイブ・ディー Bending zoom camera module
JP5848052B2 (en) * 2011-07-21 2016-01-27 日本電産サンキョー株式会社 Optical unit with shake correction function
US9285566B2 (en) * 2013-08-08 2016-03-15 Apple Inc. Mirror tilt actuation
JP6198621B2 (en) * 2014-01-30 2017-09-20 Hoya株式会社 Imaging device
JP6483980B2 (en) * 2014-09-18 2019-03-13 日本電産サンキョー株式会社 Optical unit with shake correction function
KR102088603B1 (en) * 2015-04-16 2020-03-13 코어포토닉스 리미티드 Auto focus and optical imagestabilization in a compact folded camera
CN206042066U (en) * 2016-06-17 2017-03-22 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 Split type module of stealthily hoping
CN205942054U (en) * 2016-08-24 2017-02-08 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 Periscopic module of making a video recording

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008124763A (en) * 2006-11-10 2008-05-29 Canon Inc Imaging apparatus, control method, and program
JP2012083604A (en) * 2010-10-13 2012-04-26 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Camera shake correcting device, camera cone, and image pickup apparatus
JP2015092285A (en) 2015-02-03 2015-05-14 株式会社ファイブ・ディー Vibration-proof device for folded zoom camera module
JP2017103954A (en) 2015-12-03 2017-06-08 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Piezoelectric driving device, motor, robot, and pump
JP2017119447A (en) 2015-12-28 2017-07-06 株式会社トモキスペシャルパーツ Light emission shift knob
JP2017209582A (en) 2017-09-11 2017-11-30 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7417418B2 (en) 2018-12-27 2024-01-18 台湾東電化股▲ふん▼有限公司 Optical element drive mechanism
CN109819622A (en) * 2019-03-18 2019-05-28 深圳市沃特沃德股份有限公司 Mainboard mounting structure and electronic equipment
CN109819622B (en) * 2019-03-18 2020-10-27 深圳市沃特沃德股份有限公司 Mainboard mounting structure and electronic equipment
CN114303359A (en) * 2019-07-23 2022-04-08 Lg 伊诺特有限公司 Camera actuator, camera module including the same, and camera apparatus
WO2021020445A1 (en) * 2019-08-01 2021-02-04 日本電産サンキョー株式会社 Optical unit
JP2021027431A (en) * 2019-08-01 2021-02-22 日本電産サンキョー株式会社 Optical unit
JP7381241B2 (en) 2019-08-01 2023-11-15 ニデックインスツルメンツ株式会社 optical unit
CN112540439A (en) * 2019-09-05 2021-03-23 新思考电机有限公司 Lens driving device, camera device and electronic equipment
WO2021234995A1 (en) * 2020-05-22 2021-11-25 日本電産株式会社 Optical unit
EP4242742A4 (en) * 2020-12-07 2024-05-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Camera module for supporting optical zoom, and electronic device comprising same
US20220394163A1 (en) * 2021-06-08 2022-12-08 Mitsumi Electric Co., Ltd. Optical actuator, camera module, and camera-mounted apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115220282A (en) 2022-10-21
JP2022040135A (en) 2022-03-10
CN115220282B (en) 2024-06-14
JP7231865B2 (en) 2023-03-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6997370B2 (en) Camera actuators, camera modules, and camera-mounted devices
WO2018216778A1 (en) Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounted device
TWI777032B (en) Camera actuator, camera module, and camera-mounted device
CN109975942B (en) Lens driving device, camera module, and camera mounting device
TWI789489B (en) Camera actuator, camera module, and camera-mounted device
CN112946856B (en) Lens driving device, camera module, and camera mounting device
JP7157314B2 (en) Camera module and camera mounting device
US11982863B2 (en) Camera actuator, camera module, and camera mounting device
WO2018021489A1 (en) Lens driving device, camera module, and camera-mounted apparatus
WO2020090639A1 (en) Actuator for camera, camera module, and device with camera
KR20220083858A (en) Lens drive device, camera module, and camera mounting device
KR20220017398A (en) Lens drive device, camera module, and camera mounting device
CN112859281A (en) Lens driving device, camera module, and camera mounting device
JP7372563B2 (en) Lens drive device, camera module, and camera mounting device
KR20230089527A (en) Camera module
CN118119886A (en) Optical element driving device, camera module, and camera mounting device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18806620

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20197033852

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2018806620

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2018806620

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20200102